Commit bec8c647bc263d80040413a09f54751bc27c9d31
Committed by
Tom Rini
1 parent
8981433f4d
Exists in
smarc_8mq_lf_v2020.04
and in
17 other branches
Integrate AT91 bootcount driver
Integrate Boot counter for Atmel AT91SAM9XE into Kconfig Reviewed-by: Lukasz Majewski <lukma@denx.de> Signed-off-by: Alex Kiernan <alex.kiernan@gmail.com>
Showing 3 changed files with 6 additions and 5 deletions Inline Diff
README
1 | # | 1 | # |
2 | # (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013 | 2 | # (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013 |
3 | # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de. | 3 | # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de. |
4 | # | 4 | # |
5 | # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ | 5 | # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ |
6 | # | 6 | # |
7 | 7 | ||
8 | Summary: | 8 | Summary: |
9 | ======== | 9 | ======== |
10 | 10 | ||
11 | This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for | 11 | This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for |
12 | Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other | 12 | Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other |
13 | processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to | 13 | processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to |
14 | initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application | 14 | initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application |
15 | code. | 15 | code. |
16 | 16 | ||
17 | The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of | 17 | The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of |
18 | the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some | 18 | the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some |
19 | header files in common, and special provision has been made to | 19 | header files in common, and special provision has been made to |
20 | support booting of Linux images. | 20 | support booting of Linux images. |
21 | 21 | ||
22 | Some attention has been paid to make this software easily | 22 | Some attention has been paid to make this software easily |
23 | configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are | 23 | configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are |
24 | implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to | 24 | implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to |
25 | add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used | 25 | add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used |
26 | code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can | 26 | code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can |
27 | load and run it dynamically. | 27 | load and run it dynamically. |
28 | 28 | ||
29 | 29 | ||
30 | Status: | 30 | Status: |
31 | ======= | 31 | ======= |
32 | 32 | ||
33 | In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the | 33 | In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the |
34 | Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered | 34 | Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered |
35 | "working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems. | 35 | "working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems. |
36 | 36 | ||
37 | In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed | 37 | In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed |
38 | the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files | 38 | the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files |
39 | scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or | 39 | scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or |
40 | companies responsible for various boards and subsystems. | 40 | companies responsible for various boards and subsystems. |
41 | 41 | ||
42 | Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the | 42 | Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the |
43 | actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically | 43 | actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically |
44 | from the Git log using: | 44 | from the Git log using: |
45 | 45 | ||
46 | make CHANGELOG | 46 | make CHANGELOG |
47 | 47 | ||
48 | 48 | ||
49 | Where to get help: | 49 | Where to get help: |
50 | ================== | 50 | ================== |
51 | 51 | ||
52 | In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for | 52 | In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for |
53 | U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at | 53 | U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at |
54 | <u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic | 54 | <u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic |
55 | on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's. | 55 | on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's. |
56 | Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and | 56 | Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and |
57 | http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot | 57 | http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot |
58 | 58 | ||
59 | 59 | ||
60 | Where to get source code: | 60 | Where to get source code: |
61 | ========================= | 61 | ========================= |
62 | 62 | ||
63 | The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at | 63 | The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at |
64 | git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at | 64 | git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at |
65 | http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary | 65 | http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary |
66 | 66 | ||
67 | The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of | 67 | The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of |
68 | any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also | 68 | any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also |
69 | available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ | 69 | available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ |
70 | directory. | 70 | directory. |
71 | 71 | ||
72 | Pre-built (and tested) images are available from | 72 | Pre-built (and tested) images are available from |
73 | ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/ | 73 | ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/ |
74 | 74 | ||
75 | 75 | ||
76 | Where we come from: | 76 | Where we come from: |
77 | =================== | 77 | =================== |
78 | 78 | ||
79 | - start from 8xxrom sources | 79 | - start from 8xxrom sources |
80 | - create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot) | 80 | - create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot) |
81 | - clean up code | 81 | - clean up code |
82 | - make it easier to add custom boards | 82 | - make it easier to add custom boards |
83 | - make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs | 83 | - make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs |
84 | - extend functions, especially: | 84 | - extend functions, especially: |
85 | * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader | 85 | * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader |
86 | * S-Record download | 86 | * S-Record download |
87 | * network boot | 87 | * network boot |
88 | * PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot | 88 | * PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot |
89 | - create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot) | 89 | - create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot) |
90 | - add other CPU families (starting with ARM) | 90 | - add other CPU families (starting with ARM) |
91 | - create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot) | 91 | - create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot) |
92 | - current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot | 92 | - current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot |
93 | 93 | ||
94 | 94 | ||
95 | Names and Spelling: | 95 | Names and Spelling: |
96 | =================== | 96 | =================== |
97 | 97 | ||
98 | The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling | 98 | The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling |
99 | "U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments | 99 | "U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments |
100 | in source files etc.). Example: | 100 | in source files etc.). Example: |
101 | 101 | ||
102 | This is the README file for the U-Boot project. | 102 | This is the README file for the U-Boot project. |
103 | 103 | ||
104 | File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples: | 104 | File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples: |
105 | 105 | ||
106 | include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h | 106 | include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h |
107 | 107 | ||
108 | #include <asm/u-boot.h> | 108 | #include <asm/u-boot.h> |
109 | 109 | ||
110 | Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on | 110 | Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on |
111 | the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example: | 111 | the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example: |
112 | 112 | ||
113 | U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo | 113 | U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo |
114 | IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start | 114 | IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start |
115 | 115 | ||
116 | 116 | ||
117 | Versioning: | 117 | Versioning: |
118 | =========== | 118 | =========== |
119 | 119 | ||
120 | Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases | 120 | Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases |
121 | were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning | 121 | were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning |
122 | into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by | 122 | into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by |
123 | names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date. | 123 | names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date. |
124 | Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix | 124 | Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix |
125 | releases in "stable" maintenance trees. | 125 | releases in "stable" maintenance trees. |
126 | 126 | ||
127 | Examples: | 127 | Examples: |
128 | U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009 | 128 | U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009 |
129 | U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree | 129 | U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree |
130 | U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release | 130 | U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release |
131 | 131 | ||
132 | 132 | ||
133 | Directory Hierarchy: | 133 | Directory Hierarchy: |
134 | ==================== | 134 | ==================== |
135 | 135 | ||
136 | /arch Architecture specific files | 136 | /arch Architecture specific files |
137 | /arc Files generic to ARC architecture | 137 | /arc Files generic to ARC architecture |
138 | /arm Files generic to ARM architecture | 138 | /arm Files generic to ARM architecture |
139 | /m68k Files generic to m68k architecture | 139 | /m68k Files generic to m68k architecture |
140 | /microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture | 140 | /microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture |
141 | /mips Files generic to MIPS architecture | 141 | /mips Files generic to MIPS architecture |
142 | /nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture | 142 | /nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture |
143 | /nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture | 143 | /nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture |
144 | /openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture | 144 | /openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture |
145 | /powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture | 145 | /powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture |
146 | /riscv Files generic to RISC-V architecture | 146 | /riscv Files generic to RISC-V architecture |
147 | /sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox" | 147 | /sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox" |
148 | /sh Files generic to SH architecture | 148 | /sh Files generic to SH architecture |
149 | /x86 Files generic to x86 architecture | 149 | /x86 Files generic to x86 architecture |
150 | /api Machine/arch independent API for external apps | 150 | /api Machine/arch independent API for external apps |
151 | /board Board dependent files | 151 | /board Board dependent files |
152 | /cmd U-Boot commands functions | 152 | /cmd U-Boot commands functions |
153 | /common Misc architecture independent functions | 153 | /common Misc architecture independent functions |
154 | /configs Board default configuration files | 154 | /configs Board default configuration files |
155 | /disk Code for disk drive partition handling | 155 | /disk Code for disk drive partition handling |
156 | /doc Documentation (don't expect too much) | 156 | /doc Documentation (don't expect too much) |
157 | /drivers Commonly used device drivers | 157 | /drivers Commonly used device drivers |
158 | /dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt. | 158 | /dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt. |
159 | /examples Example code for standalone applications, etc. | 159 | /examples Example code for standalone applications, etc. |
160 | /fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.) | 160 | /fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.) |
161 | /include Header Files | 161 | /include Header Files |
162 | /lib Library routines generic to all architectures | 162 | /lib Library routines generic to all architectures |
163 | /Licenses Various license files | 163 | /Licenses Various license files |
164 | /net Networking code | 164 | /net Networking code |
165 | /post Power On Self Test | 165 | /post Power On Self Test |
166 | /scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles | 166 | /scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles |
167 | /test Various unit test files | 167 | /test Various unit test files |
168 | /tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc. | 168 | /tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc. |
169 | 169 | ||
170 | Software Configuration: | 170 | Software Configuration: |
171 | ======================= | 171 | ======================= |
172 | 172 | ||
173 | Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the | 173 | Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the |
174 | rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible. | 174 | rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible. |
175 | 175 | ||
176 | There are two classes of configuration variables: | 176 | There are two classes of configuration variables: |
177 | 177 | ||
178 | * Configuration _OPTIONS_: | 178 | * Configuration _OPTIONS_: |
179 | These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with | 179 | These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with |
180 | "CONFIG_". | 180 | "CONFIG_". |
181 | 181 | ||
182 | * Configuration _SETTINGS_: | 182 | * Configuration _SETTINGS_: |
183 | These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if | 183 | These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if |
184 | you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with | 184 | you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with |
185 | "CONFIG_SYS_". | 185 | "CONFIG_SYS_". |
186 | 186 | ||
187 | Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating | 187 | Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating |
188 | symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently, | 188 | symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently, |
189 | U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel, | 189 | U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel, |
190 | allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your | 190 | allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your |
191 | build. | 191 | build. |
192 | 192 | ||
193 | 193 | ||
194 | Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type: | 194 | Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type: |
195 | --------------------------------------------------- | 195 | --------------------------------------------------- |
196 | 196 | ||
197 | For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default | 197 | For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default |
198 | configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig". | 198 | configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig". |
199 | 199 | ||
200 | Example: For a TQM823L module type: | 200 | Example: For a TQM823L module type: |
201 | 201 | ||
202 | cd u-boot | 202 | cd u-boot |
203 | make TQM823L_defconfig | 203 | make TQM823L_defconfig |
204 | 204 | ||
205 | Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board | 205 | Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board |
206 | you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file | 206 | you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file |
207 | doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards. | 207 | doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards. |
208 | 208 | ||
209 | Sandbox Environment: | 209 | Sandbox Environment: |
210 | -------------------- | 210 | -------------------- |
211 | 211 | ||
212 | U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox' | 212 | U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox' |
213 | board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture- | 213 | board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture- |
214 | specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to | 214 | specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to |
215 | run some of U-Boot's tests. | 215 | run some of U-Boot's tests. |
216 | 216 | ||
217 | See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details. | 217 | See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details. |
218 | 218 | ||
219 | 219 | ||
220 | Board Initialisation Flow: | 220 | Board Initialisation Flow: |
221 | -------------------------- | 221 | -------------------------- |
222 | 222 | ||
223 | This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both | 223 | This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both |
224 | SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules). | 224 | SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules). |
225 | 225 | ||
226 | Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in | 226 | Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in |
227 | more detail later in this file. | 227 | more detail later in this file. |
228 | 228 | ||
229 | At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names | 229 | At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names |
230 | and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures | 230 | and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures |
231 | may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use | 231 | may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use |
232 | CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this. | 232 | CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this. |
233 | 233 | ||
234 | Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly | 234 | Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly |
235 | CPU-specific) start.S file, such as: | 235 | CPU-specific) start.S file, such as: |
236 | 236 | ||
237 | - arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S | 237 | - arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S |
238 | - arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S | 238 | - arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S |
239 | - arch/mips/cpu/start.S | 239 | - arch/mips/cpu/start.S |
240 | 240 | ||
241 | and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and | 241 | and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and |
242 | limitations of each of these functions are described below. | 242 | limitations of each of these functions are described below. |
243 | 243 | ||
244 | lowlevel_init(): | 244 | lowlevel_init(): |
245 | - purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f() | 245 | - purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f() |
246 | - no global_data or BSS | 246 | - no global_data or BSS |
247 | - there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed) | 247 | - there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed) |
248 | - must not set up SDRAM or use console | 248 | - must not set up SDRAM or use console |
249 | - must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to | 249 | - must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to |
250 | board_init_f() | 250 | board_init_f() |
251 | - this is almost never needed | 251 | - this is almost never needed |
252 | - return normally from this function | 252 | - return normally from this function |
253 | 253 | ||
254 | board_init_f(): | 254 | board_init_f(): |
255 | - purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r(): | 255 | - purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r(): |
256 | i.e. SDRAM and serial UART | 256 | i.e. SDRAM and serial UART |
257 | - global_data is available | 257 | - global_data is available |
258 | - stack is in SRAM | 258 | - stack is in SRAM |
259 | - BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables, | 259 | - BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables, |
260 | only stack variables and global_data | 260 | only stack variables and global_data |
261 | 261 | ||
262 | Non-SPL-specific notes: | 262 | Non-SPL-specific notes: |
263 | - dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this | 263 | - dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this |
264 | can do nothing | 264 | can do nothing |
265 | 265 | ||
266 | SPL-specific notes: | 266 | SPL-specific notes: |
267 | - you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own | 267 | - you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own |
268 | version as needed. | 268 | version as needed. |
269 | - preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis | 269 | - preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis |
270 | - should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work | 270 | - should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work |
271 | - these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S | 271 | - these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S |
272 | - must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r() | 272 | - must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r() |
273 | directly) | 273 | directly) |
274 | 274 | ||
275 | Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at | 275 | Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at |
276 | this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below | 276 | this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below |
277 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of | 277 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of |
278 | memory. | 278 | memory. |
279 | 279 | ||
280 | board_init_r(): | 280 | board_init_r(): |
281 | - purpose: main execution, common code | 281 | - purpose: main execution, common code |
282 | - global_data is available | 282 | - global_data is available |
283 | - SDRAM is available | 283 | - SDRAM is available |
284 | - BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used | 284 | - BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used |
285 | - execution eventually continues to main_loop() | 285 | - execution eventually continues to main_loop() |
286 | 286 | ||
287 | Non-SPL-specific notes: | 287 | Non-SPL-specific notes: |
288 | - U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from | 288 | - U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from |
289 | there. | 289 | there. |
290 | 290 | ||
291 | SPL-specific notes: | 291 | SPL-specific notes: |
292 | - stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and | 292 | - stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and |
293 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM | 293 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM |
294 | - preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is | 294 | - preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is |
295 | done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a | 295 | done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a |
296 | spl_board_init() function containing this call | 296 | spl_board_init() function containing this call |
297 | - loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux | 297 | - loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux |
298 | 298 | ||
299 | 299 | ||
300 | 300 | ||
301 | Configuration Options: | 301 | Configuration Options: |
302 | ---------------------- | 302 | ---------------------- |
303 | 303 | ||
304 | Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all | 304 | Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all |
305 | such information is kept in a configuration file | 305 | such information is kept in a configuration file |
306 | "include/configs/<board_name>.h". | 306 | "include/configs/<board_name>.h". |
307 | 307 | ||
308 | Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in | 308 | Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in |
309 | "include/configs/TQM823L.h". | 309 | "include/configs/TQM823L.h". |
310 | 310 | ||
311 | 311 | ||
312 | Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux | 312 | Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux |
313 | kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to | 313 | kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to |
314 | build a config tool - later. | 314 | build a config tool - later. |
315 | 315 | ||
316 | - ARM Platform Bus Type(CCI): | 316 | - ARM Platform Bus Type(CCI): |
317 | CoreLink Cache Coherent Interconnect (CCI) is ARM BUS which | 317 | CoreLink Cache Coherent Interconnect (CCI) is ARM BUS which |
318 | provides full cache coherency between two clusters of multi-core | 318 | provides full cache coherency between two clusters of multi-core |
319 | CPUs and I/O coherency for devices and I/O masters | 319 | CPUs and I/O coherency for devices and I/O masters |
320 | 320 | ||
321 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCI400 | 321 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCI400 |
322 | 322 | ||
323 | Defined For SoC that has cache coherent interconnect | 323 | Defined For SoC that has cache coherent interconnect |
324 | CCN-400 | 324 | CCN-400 |
325 | 325 | ||
326 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCN504 | 326 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCN504 |
327 | 327 | ||
328 | Defined for SoC that has cache coherent interconnect CCN-504 | 328 | Defined for SoC that has cache coherent interconnect CCN-504 |
329 | 329 | ||
330 | The following options need to be configured: | 330 | The following options need to be configured: |
331 | 331 | ||
332 | - CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX. | 332 | - CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX. |
333 | 333 | ||
334 | - Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS. | 334 | - Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS. |
335 | 335 | ||
336 | - Marvell Family Member | 336 | - Marvell Family Member |
337 | CONFIG_SYS_MVFS - define it if you want to enable | 337 | CONFIG_SYS_MVFS - define it if you want to enable |
338 | multiple fs option at one time | 338 | multiple fs option at one time |
339 | for marvell soc family | 339 | for marvell soc family |
340 | 340 | ||
341 | - 85xx CPU Options: | 341 | - 85xx CPU Options: |
342 | CONFIG_SYS_PPC64 | 342 | CONFIG_SYS_PPC64 |
343 | 343 | ||
344 | Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements | 344 | Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements |
345 | the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR | 345 | the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR |
346 | compliance, among other possible reasons. | 346 | compliance, among other possible reasons. |
347 | 347 | ||
348 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV | 348 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV |
349 | 349 | ||
350 | Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the | 350 | Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the |
351 | system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ | 351 | system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ |
352 | devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc. | 352 | devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc. |
353 | 353 | ||
354 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT | 354 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT |
355 | 355 | ||
356 | Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device | 356 | Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device |
357 | tree nodes for the given platform. | 357 | tree nodes for the given platform. |
358 | 358 | ||
359 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 | 359 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 |
360 | 360 | ||
361 | Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set, | 361 | Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set, |
362 | then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and | 362 | then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and |
363 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set. | 363 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set. |
364 | 364 | ||
365 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV | 365 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV |
366 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional) | 366 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional) |
367 | 367 | ||
368 | Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR) | 368 | Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR) |
369 | for which the A004510 workaround should be applied. | 369 | for which the A004510 workaround should be applied. |
370 | 370 | ||
371 | The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision | 371 | The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision |
372 | of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus | 372 | of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus |
373 | p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls | 373 | p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls |
374 | whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set. | 374 | whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set. |
375 | 375 | ||
376 | See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about | 376 | See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about |
377 | this erratum. | 377 | this erratum. |
378 | 378 | ||
379 | CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND | 379 | CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND |
380 | Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only | 380 | Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only |
381 | required during NOR boot. | 381 | required during NOR boot. |
382 | 382 | ||
383 | CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND | 383 | CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND |
384 | Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only | 384 | Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only |
385 | required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision | 385 | required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision |
386 | 386 | ||
387 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY | 387 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY |
388 | 388 | ||
389 | This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600 | 389 | This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600 |
390 | according to the A004510 workaround. | 390 | according to the A004510 workaround. |
391 | 391 | ||
392 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR | 392 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR |
393 | This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is | 393 | This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is |
394 | connected exclusively to the DSP cores. | 394 | connected exclusively to the DSP cores. |
395 | 395 | ||
396 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR | 396 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR |
397 | This value denotes start offset of M2 memory | 397 | This value denotes start offset of M2 memory |
398 | which is directly connected to the DSP core. | 398 | which is directly connected to the DSP core. |
399 | 399 | ||
400 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR | 400 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR |
401 | This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly | 401 | This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly |
402 | connected to the DSP core. | 402 | connected to the DSP core. |
403 | 403 | ||
404 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT | 404 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT |
405 | This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space. | 405 | This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space. |
406 | 406 | ||
407 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK | 407 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK |
408 | Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's. | 408 | Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's. |
409 | In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply | 409 | In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply |
410 | clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock. | 410 | clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock. |
411 | 411 | ||
412 | CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F | 412 | CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F |
413 | This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the | 413 | This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the |
414 | time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized. | 414 | time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized. |
415 | 415 | ||
416 | CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP | 416 | CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP |
417 | Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is | 417 | Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is |
418 | supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up. | 418 | supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up. |
419 | 419 | ||
420 | - Generic CPU options: | 420 | - Generic CPU options: |
421 | CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN | 421 | CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN |
422 | 422 | ||
423 | Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those | 423 | Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those |
424 | values is arch specific. | 424 | values is arch specific. |
425 | 425 | ||
426 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR | 426 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR |
427 | Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is | 427 | Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is |
428 | found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core | 428 | found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core |
429 | SoCs. | 429 | SoCs. |
430 | 430 | ||
431 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR | 431 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR |
432 | Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base. | 432 | Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base. |
433 | 433 | ||
434 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU | 434 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU |
435 | Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as | 435 | Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as |
436 | deskew training are not available. | 436 | deskew training are not available. |
437 | 437 | ||
438 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1 | 438 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1 |
439 | Freescale DDR1 controller. | 439 | Freescale DDR1 controller. |
440 | 440 | ||
441 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2 | 441 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2 |
442 | Freescale DDR2 controller. | 442 | Freescale DDR2 controller. |
443 | 443 | ||
444 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3 | 444 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3 |
445 | Freescale DDR3 controller. | 445 | Freescale DDR3 controller. |
446 | 446 | ||
447 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4 | 447 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4 |
448 | Freescale DDR4 controller. | 448 | Freescale DDR4 controller. |
449 | 449 | ||
450 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3 | 450 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3 |
451 | Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs. | 451 | Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs. |
452 | 452 | ||
453 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1 | 453 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1 |
454 | Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with | 454 | Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with |
455 | Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board | 455 | Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board |
456 | implemetation. | 456 | implemetation. |
457 | 457 | ||
458 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2 | 458 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2 |
459 | Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with | 459 | Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with |
460 | Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board | 460 | Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board |
461 | implementation. | 461 | implementation. |
462 | 462 | ||
463 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3 | 463 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3 |
464 | Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with | 464 | Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with |
465 | Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers. | 465 | Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers. |
466 | 466 | ||
467 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L | 467 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L |
468 | Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with | 468 | Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with |
469 | DDR3L controllers. | 469 | DDR3L controllers. |
470 | 470 | ||
471 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4 | 471 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4 |
472 | Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with | 472 | Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with |
473 | DDR4 controllers. | 473 | DDR4 controllers. |
474 | 474 | ||
475 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE | 475 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE |
476 | Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian | 476 | Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian |
477 | 477 | ||
478 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE | 478 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE |
479 | Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian | 479 | Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian |
480 | 480 | ||
481 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV | 481 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV |
482 | Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller). | 482 | Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller). |
483 | 483 | ||
484 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV | 484 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV |
485 | Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller). | 485 | Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller). |
486 | 486 | ||
487 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI | 487 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI |
488 | It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image. | 488 | It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image. |
489 | Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details | 489 | Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details |
490 | 490 | ||
491 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW | 491 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW |
492 | It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image. | 492 | It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image. |
493 | PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution. | 493 | PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution. |
494 | Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details | 494 | Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details |
495 | 495 | ||
496 | CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL | 496 | CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL |
497 | It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format | 497 | It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format |
498 | concatenated with u-boot binary. | 498 | concatenated with u-boot binary. |
499 | 499 | ||
500 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE | 500 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE |
501 | Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian | 501 | Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian |
502 | 502 | ||
503 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE | 503 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE |
504 | Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian | 504 | Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian |
505 | 505 | ||
506 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY | 506 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY |
507 | Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the | 507 | Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the |
508 | same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But | 508 | same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But |
509 | it could be different for ARM SoCs. | 509 | it could be different for ARM SoCs. |
510 | 510 | ||
511 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B | 511 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B |
512 | DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special | 512 | DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special |
513 | interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape | 513 | interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape |
514 | SoCs with ARM core. | 514 | SoCs with ARM core. |
515 | 515 | ||
516 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS | 516 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS |
517 | Number of controllers used as main memory. | 517 | Number of controllers used as main memory. |
518 | 518 | ||
519 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS | 519 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS |
520 | Number of controllers used for other than main memory. | 520 | Number of controllers used for other than main memory. |
521 | 521 | ||
522 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR | 522 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR |
523 | Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA. | 523 | Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA. |
524 | 524 | ||
525 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE | 525 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE |
526 | Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian | 526 | Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian |
527 | 527 | ||
528 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE | 528 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE |
529 | Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian | 529 | Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian |
530 | 530 | ||
531 | - MIPS CPU options: | 531 | - MIPS CPU options: |
532 | CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET | 532 | CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET |
533 | 533 | ||
534 | Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack | 534 | Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack |
535 | pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before | 535 | pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before |
536 | relocation. | 536 | relocation. |
537 | 537 | ||
538 | CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE | 538 | CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE |
539 | 539 | ||
540 | Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU. | 540 | Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU. |
541 | See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h. | 541 | See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h. |
542 | Possible values are: | 542 | Possible values are: |
543 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA | 543 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA |
544 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA | 544 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA |
545 | CONF_CM_UNCACHED | 545 | CONF_CM_UNCACHED |
546 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT | 546 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT |
547 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE | 547 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE |
548 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW | 548 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW |
549 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW | 549 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW |
550 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED | 550 | CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED |
551 | 551 | ||
552 | CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG | 552 | CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG |
553 | 553 | ||
554 | Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. | 554 | Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. |
555 | See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S. | 555 | See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S. |
556 | 556 | ||
557 | CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES | 557 | CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES |
558 | 558 | ||
559 | Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq | 559 | Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq |
560 | XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to | 560 | XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to |
561 | be swapped if a flash programmer is used. | 561 | be swapped if a flash programmer is used. |
562 | 562 | ||
563 | - ARM options: | 563 | - ARM options: |
564 | CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH | 564 | CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH |
565 | 565 | ||
566 | Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not | 566 | Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not |
567 | clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15. | 567 | clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15. |
568 | 568 | ||
569 | COUNTER_FREQUENCY | 569 | COUNTER_FREQUENCY |
570 | Generic timer clock source frequency. | 570 | Generic timer clock source frequency. |
571 | 571 | ||
572 | COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL | 572 | COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL |
573 | Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is | 573 | Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is |
574 | different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined | 574 | different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined |
575 | at run time. | 575 | at run time. |
576 | 576 | ||
577 | - Tegra SoC options: | 577 | - Tegra SoC options: |
578 | CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE | 578 | CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE |
579 | 579 | ||
580 | Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain | 580 | Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain |
581 | impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode, | 581 | impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode, |
582 | such as ARM architectural timer initialization. | 582 | such as ARM architectural timer initialization. |
583 | 583 | ||
584 | - Linux Kernel Interface: | 584 | - Linux Kernel Interface: |
585 | CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ | 585 | CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ |
586 | 586 | ||
587 | U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz | 587 | U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz |
588 | internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux | 588 | internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux |
589 | kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the | 589 | kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the |
590 | bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable | 590 | bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable |
591 | "clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot | 591 | "clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot |
592 | converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the | 592 | converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the |
593 | Linux kernel. | 593 | Linux kernel. |
594 | When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of | 594 | When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of |
595 | "clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the | 595 | "clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the |
596 | default environment. | 596 | default environment. |
597 | 597 | ||
598 | CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only] | 598 | CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only] |
599 | 599 | ||
600 | When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions | 600 | When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions |
601 | expect it to be in bytes, others in MB. | 601 | expect it to be in bytes, others in MB. |
602 | Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes. | 602 | Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes. |
603 | 603 | ||
604 | CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT | 604 | CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT |
605 | 605 | ||
606 | New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be | 606 | New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be |
607 | passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware | 607 | passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware |
608 | concepts). | 608 | concepts). |
609 | 609 | ||
610 | CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT | 610 | CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT |
611 | * New libfdt-based support | 611 | * New libfdt-based support |
612 | * Adds the "fdt" command | 612 | * Adds the "fdt" command |
613 | * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt | 613 | * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt |
614 | 614 | ||
615 | OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency. | 615 | OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency. |
616 | OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device | 616 | OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device |
617 | 617 | ||
618 | boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC | 618 | boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC |
619 | addresses | 619 | addresses |
620 | 620 | ||
621 | CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP | 621 | CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP |
622 | 622 | ||
623 | Board code has addition modification that it wants to make | 623 | Board code has addition modification that it wants to make |
624 | to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel | 624 | to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel |
625 | 625 | ||
626 | CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP | 626 | CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP |
627 | 627 | ||
628 | Other code has addition modification that it wants to make | 628 | Other code has addition modification that it wants to make |
629 | to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel. | 629 | to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel. |
630 | This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting | 630 | This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting |
631 | the kernel. | 631 | the kernel. |
632 | 632 | ||
633 | CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP | 633 | CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP |
634 | 634 | ||
635 | U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not. | 635 | U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not. |
636 | If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot | 636 | If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot |
637 | removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux, | 637 | removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux, |
638 | so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and | 638 | so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and |
639 | crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where | 639 | crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where |
640 | no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7. | 640 | no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7. |
641 | 641 | ||
642 | CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory] | 642 | CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory] |
643 | 643 | ||
644 | This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one | 644 | This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one |
645 | machine type and must be used to specify the machine type | 645 | machine type and must be used to specify the machine type |
646 | number as it appears in the ARM machine registry | 646 | number as it appears in the ARM machine registry |
647 | (see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/). | 647 | (see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/). |
648 | Only boards that have multiple machine types supported | 648 | Only boards that have multiple machine types supported |
649 | in a single configuration file and the machine type is | 649 | in a single configuration file and the machine type is |
650 | runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting. | 650 | runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting. |
651 | 651 | ||
652 | - vxWorks boot parameters: | 652 | - vxWorks boot parameters: |
653 | 653 | ||
654 | bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following | 654 | bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following |
655 | environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask, | 655 | environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask, |
656 | serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs. | 656 | serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs. |
657 | It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile. | 657 | It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile. |
658 | 658 | ||
659 | Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride | 659 | Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride |
660 | the defaults discussed just above. | 660 | the defaults discussed just above. |
661 | 661 | ||
662 | - Cache Configuration: | 662 | - Cache Configuration: |
663 | CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot | 663 | CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot |
664 | CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot | 664 | CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot |
665 | CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot | 665 | CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot |
666 | 666 | ||
667 | - Cache Configuration for ARM: | 667 | - Cache Configuration for ARM: |
668 | CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache | 668 | CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache |
669 | controller | 669 | controller |
670 | CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310 | 670 | CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310 |
671 | controller register space | 671 | controller register space |
672 | 672 | ||
673 | - Serial Ports: | 673 | - Serial Ports: |
674 | CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL | 674 | CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL |
675 | 675 | ||
676 | Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs. | 676 | Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs. |
677 | 677 | ||
678 | CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL | 678 | CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL |
679 | 679 | ||
680 | Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs. | 680 | Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs. |
681 | 681 | ||
682 | CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK | 682 | CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK |
683 | 683 | ||
684 | If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to | 684 | If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to |
685 | the clock speed of the UARTs. | 685 | the clock speed of the UARTs. |
686 | 686 | ||
687 | CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS | 687 | CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS |
688 | 688 | ||
689 | If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board, | 689 | If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board, |
690 | define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported) | 690 | define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported) |
691 | port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h | 691 | port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h |
692 | 692 | ||
693 | CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL | 693 | CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL |
694 | 694 | ||
695 | Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver. | 695 | Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver. |
696 | Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver | 696 | Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver |
697 | 697 | ||
698 | - Console Baudrate: | 698 | - Console Baudrate: |
699 | CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps | 699 | CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps |
700 | Select one of the baudrates listed in | 700 | Select one of the baudrates listed in |
701 | CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. | 701 | CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. |
702 | 702 | ||
703 | - Autoboot Command: | 703 | - Autoboot Command: |
704 | CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND | 704 | CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND |
705 | Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled; | 705 | Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled; |
706 | define a command string that is automatically executed | 706 | define a command string that is automatically executed |
707 | when no character is read on the console interface | 707 | when no character is read on the console interface |
708 | within "Boot Delay" after reset. | 708 | within "Boot Delay" after reset. |
709 | 709 | ||
710 | CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT | 710 | CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT |
711 | The value of these goes into the environment as | 711 | The value of these goes into the environment as |
712 | "ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used | 712 | "ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used |
713 | as a convenience, when switching between booting from | 713 | as a convenience, when switching between booting from |
714 | RAM and NFS. | 714 | RAM and NFS. |
715 | 715 | ||
716 | - Pre-Boot Commands: | 716 | - Pre-Boot Commands: |
717 | CONFIG_PREBOOT | 717 | CONFIG_PREBOOT |
718 | 718 | ||
719 | When this option is #defined, the existence of the | 719 | When this option is #defined, the existence of the |
720 | environment variable "preboot" will be checked | 720 | environment variable "preboot" will be checked |
721 | immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY | 721 | immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY |
722 | countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp. | 722 | countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp. |
723 | entering interactive mode. | 723 | entering interactive mode. |
724 | 724 | ||
725 | This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is | 725 | This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is |
726 | automatically generated or modified. For an example | 726 | automatically generated or modified. For an example |
727 | see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is | 727 | see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is |
728 | modified when the user holds down a certain | 728 | modified when the user holds down a certain |
729 | combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when | 729 | combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when |
730 | booting the systems | 730 | booting the systems |
731 | 731 | ||
732 | - Serial Download Echo Mode: | 732 | - Serial Download Echo Mode: |
733 | CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO | 733 | CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO |
734 | If defined to 1, all characters received during a | 734 | If defined to 1, all characters received during a |
735 | serial download (using the "loads" command) are | 735 | serial download (using the "loads" command) are |
736 | echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal | 736 | echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal |
737 | emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take | 737 | emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take |
738 | time on others. This setting #define's the initial | 738 | time on others. This setting #define's the initial |
739 | value of the "loads_echo" environment variable. | 739 | value of the "loads_echo" environment variable. |
740 | 740 | ||
741 | - Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined) | 741 | - Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined) |
742 | CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE | 742 | CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE |
743 | Select one of the baudrates listed in | 743 | Select one of the baudrates listed in |
744 | CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. | 744 | CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. |
745 | 745 | ||
746 | - Removal of commands | 746 | - Removal of commands |
747 | If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable | 747 | If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable |
748 | CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line | 748 | CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line |
749 | will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the | 749 | will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the |
750 | boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command() | 750 | boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command() |
751 | instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very | 751 | instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very |
752 | simple boot procedures. | 752 | simple boot procedures. |
753 | 753 | ||
754 | - Regular expression support: | 754 | - Regular expression support: |
755 | CONFIG_REGEX | 755 | CONFIG_REGEX |
756 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against | 756 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against |
757 | the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library, | 757 | the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library, |
758 | which adds regex support to some commands, as for | 758 | which adds regex support to some commands, as for |
759 | example "env grep" and "setexpr". | 759 | example "env grep" and "setexpr". |
760 | 760 | ||
761 | - Device tree: | 761 | - Device tree: |
762 | CONFIG_OF_CONTROL | 762 | CONFIG_OF_CONTROL |
763 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree | 763 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree |
764 | to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically | 764 | to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically |
765 | compiled #defines in the board file. This option is | 765 | compiled #defines in the board file. This option is |
766 | experimental and only available on a few boards. The device | 766 | experimental and only available on a few boards. The device |
767 | tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob. | 767 | tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob. |
768 | 768 | ||
769 | U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can | 769 | U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can |
770 | be done using one of the three options below: | 770 | be done using one of the three options below: |
771 | 771 | ||
772 | CONFIG_OF_EMBED | 772 | CONFIG_OF_EMBED |
773 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree | 773 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree |
774 | binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the | 774 | binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the |
775 | board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file | 775 | board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file |
776 | is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through | 776 | is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through |
777 | the global data structure as gd->fdt_blob. | 777 | the global data structure as gd->fdt_blob. |
778 | 778 | ||
779 | CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE | 779 | CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE |
780 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree | 780 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree |
781 | binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific | 781 | binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific |
782 | code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by: | 782 | code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by: |
783 | 783 | ||
784 | cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin | 784 | cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin |
785 | 785 | ||
786 | and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called | 786 | and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called |
787 | u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can | 787 | u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can |
788 | still use the individual files if you need something more | 788 | still use the individual files if you need something more |
789 | exotic. | 789 | exotic. |
790 | 790 | ||
791 | CONFIG_OF_BOARD | 791 | CONFIG_OF_BOARD |
792 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use the device tree | 792 | If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use the device tree |
793 | provided by the board at runtime instead of embedding one with | 793 | provided by the board at runtime instead of embedding one with |
794 | the image. Only boards defining board_fdt_blob_setup() support | 794 | the image. Only boards defining board_fdt_blob_setup() support |
795 | this option (see include/fdtdec.h file). | 795 | this option (see include/fdtdec.h file). |
796 | 796 | ||
797 | - Watchdog: | 797 | - Watchdog: |
798 | CONFIG_WATCHDOG | 798 | CONFIG_WATCHDOG |
799 | If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog | 799 | If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog |
800 | support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC | 800 | support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC |
801 | specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx | 801 | specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx |
802 | CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR | 802 | CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR |
803 | register. When supported for a specific SoC is | 803 | register. When supported for a specific SoC is |
804 | available, then no further board specific code should | 804 | available, then no further board specific code should |
805 | be needed to use it. | 805 | be needed to use it. |
806 | 806 | ||
807 | CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG | 807 | CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG |
808 | When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used | 808 | When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used |
809 | SoC, then define this variable and provide board | 809 | SoC, then define this variable and provide board |
810 | specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function. | 810 | specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function. |
811 | 811 | ||
812 | CONFIG_AT91_HW_WDT_TIMEOUT | 812 | CONFIG_AT91_HW_WDT_TIMEOUT |
813 | specify the timeout in seconds. default 2 seconds. | 813 | specify the timeout in seconds. default 2 seconds. |
814 | 814 | ||
815 | - U-Boot Version: | 815 | - U-Boot Version: |
816 | CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE | 816 | CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE |
817 | If this variable is defined, an environment variable | 817 | If this variable is defined, an environment variable |
818 | named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot | 818 | named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot |
819 | version as printed by the "version" command. | 819 | version as printed by the "version" command. |
820 | Any change to this variable will be reverted at the | 820 | Any change to this variable will be reverted at the |
821 | next reset. | 821 | next reset. |
822 | 822 | ||
823 | - Real-Time Clock: | 823 | - Real-Time Clock: |
824 | 824 | ||
825 | When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC | 825 | When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC |
826 | has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the | 826 | has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the |
827 | following options: | 827 | following options: |
828 | 828 | ||
829 | CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC | 829 | CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC |
830 | CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC | 830 | CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC |
831 | CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC | 831 | CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC |
832 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC | 832 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC |
833 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC | 833 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC |
834 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC | 834 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC |
835 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC | 835 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC |
836 | CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC | 836 | CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC |
837 | CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC | 837 | CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC |
838 | CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC | 838 | CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC |
839 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337 | 839 | CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337 |
840 | CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on | 840 | CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on |
841 | RV3029 RTC. | 841 | RV3029 RTC. |
842 | 842 | ||
843 | Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface | 843 | Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface |
844 | must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. | 844 | must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. |
845 | 845 | ||
846 | - GPIO Support: | 846 | - GPIO Support: |
847 | CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO | 847 | CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO |
848 | 848 | ||
849 | The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of | 849 | The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of |
850 | chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of | 850 | chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of |
851 | pins supported by a particular chip. | 851 | pins supported by a particular chip. |
852 | 852 | ||
853 | Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface | 853 | Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface |
854 | must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. | 854 | must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. |
855 | 855 | ||
856 | - I/O tracing: | 856 | - I/O tracing: |
857 | When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O | 857 | When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O |
858 | accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out | 858 | accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out |
859 | to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is | 859 | to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is |
860 | useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that | 860 | useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that |
861 | the driver behaves the same way before and after a code | 861 | the driver behaves the same way before and after a code |
862 | change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To | 862 | change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To |
863 | add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>' | 863 | add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>' |
864 | to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test. | 864 | to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test. |
865 | 865 | ||
866 | Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below. | 866 | Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below. |
867 | Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will | 867 | Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will |
868 | still continue to operate. | 868 | still continue to operate. |
869 | 869 | ||
870 | iotrace is enabled | 870 | iotrace is enabled |
871 | Start: 10000000 (buffer start address) | 871 | Start: 10000000 (buffer start address) |
872 | Size: 00010000 (buffer size) | 872 | Size: 00010000 (buffer size) |
873 | Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset) | 873 | Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset) |
874 | Output: 10000120 (start + offset) | 874 | Output: 10000120 (start + offset) |
875 | Count: 00000018 (number of trace records) | 875 | Count: 00000018 (number of trace records) |
876 | CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records) | 876 | CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records) |
877 | 877 | ||
878 | - Timestamp Support: | 878 | - Timestamp Support: |
879 | 879 | ||
880 | When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp | 880 | When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp |
881 | (date and time) of an image is printed by image | 881 | (date and time) of an image is printed by image |
882 | commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is | 882 | commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is |
883 | automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE . | 883 | automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE . |
884 | 884 | ||
885 | - Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported: | 885 | - Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported: |
886 | Zero or more of the following: | 886 | Zero or more of the following: |
887 | CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table. | 887 | CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table. |
888 | CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc. | 888 | CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc. |
889 | CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the | 889 | CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the |
890 | bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see | 890 | bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see |
891 | disk/part_efi.c | 891 | disk/part_efi.c |
892 | CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS Memory Technology Device partition table. | 892 | CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS Memory Technology Device partition table. |
893 | 893 | ||
894 | If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_IDE or | 894 | If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_IDE or |
895 | CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at | 895 | CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at |
896 | least one non-MTD partition type as well. | 896 | least one non-MTD partition type as well. |
897 | 897 | ||
898 | - IDE Reset method: | 898 | - IDE Reset method: |
899 | CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several | 899 | CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several |
900 | board configurations files but used nowhere! | 900 | board configurations files but used nowhere! |
901 | 901 | ||
902 | CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will | 902 | CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will |
903 | be performed by calling the function | 903 | be performed by calling the function |
904 | ide_set_reset(int reset) | 904 | ide_set_reset(int reset) |
905 | which has to be defined in a board specific file | 905 | which has to be defined in a board specific file |
906 | 906 | ||
907 | - ATAPI Support: | 907 | - ATAPI Support: |
908 | CONFIG_ATAPI | 908 | CONFIG_ATAPI |
909 | 909 | ||
910 | Set this to enable ATAPI support. | 910 | Set this to enable ATAPI support. |
911 | 911 | ||
912 | - LBA48 Support | 912 | - LBA48 Support |
913 | CONFIG_LBA48 | 913 | CONFIG_LBA48 |
914 | 914 | ||
915 | Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB | 915 | Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB |
916 | Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA. | 916 | Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA. |
917 | Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only' | 917 | Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only' |
918 | support disks up to 2.1TB. | 918 | support disks up to 2.1TB. |
919 | 919 | ||
920 | CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA: | 920 | CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA: |
921 | When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses. | 921 | When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses. |
922 | Default is 32bit. | 922 | Default is 32bit. |
923 | 923 | ||
924 | - SCSI Support: | 924 | - SCSI Support: |
925 | CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and | 925 | CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and |
926 | CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID * | 926 | CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID * |
927 | CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the | 927 | CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the |
928 | maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target | 928 | maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target |
929 | devices. | 929 | devices. |
930 | 930 | ||
931 | The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of | 931 | The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of |
932 | SCSI devices found during the last scan. | 932 | SCSI devices found during the last scan. |
933 | 933 | ||
934 | - NETWORK Support (PCI): | 934 | - NETWORK Support (PCI): |
935 | CONFIG_E1000 | 935 | CONFIG_E1000 |
936 | Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips. | 936 | Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips. |
937 | 937 | ||
938 | CONFIG_E1000_SPI | 938 | CONFIG_E1000_SPI |
939 | Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x. | 939 | Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x. |
940 | This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one | 940 | This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one |
941 | of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC. | 941 | of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC. |
942 | 942 | ||
943 | CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC | 943 | CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC |
944 | Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for | 944 | Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for |
945 | example with the "sspi" command. | 945 | example with the "sspi" command. |
946 | 946 | ||
947 | CONFIG_EEPRO100 | 947 | CONFIG_EEPRO100 |
948 | Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips. | 948 | Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips. |
949 | Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM | 949 | Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM |
950 | write routine for first time initialisation. | 950 | write routine for first time initialisation. |
951 | 951 | ||
952 | CONFIG_TULIP | 952 | CONFIG_TULIP |
953 | Support for Digital 2114x chips. | 953 | Support for Digital 2114x chips. |
954 | Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific | 954 | Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific |
955 | modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611). | 955 | modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611). |
956 | 956 | ||
957 | CONFIG_NATSEMI | 957 | CONFIG_NATSEMI |
958 | Support for National dp83815 chips. | 958 | Support for National dp83815 chips. |
959 | 959 | ||
960 | CONFIG_NS8382X | 960 | CONFIG_NS8382X |
961 | Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips. | 961 | Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips. |
962 | 962 | ||
963 | - NETWORK Support (other): | 963 | - NETWORK Support (other): |
964 | 964 | ||
965 | CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC | 965 | CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC |
966 | Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC. | 966 | Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC. |
967 | 967 | ||
968 | CONFIG_RMII | 968 | CONFIG_RMII |
969 | Define this to use reduced MII inteface | 969 | Define this to use reduced MII inteface |
970 | 970 | ||
971 | CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET | 971 | CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET |
972 | If this defined, the driver is quiet. | 972 | If this defined, the driver is quiet. |
973 | The driver doen't show link status messages. | 973 | The driver doen't show link status messages. |
974 | 974 | ||
975 | CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC | 975 | CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC |
976 | Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device | 976 | Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device |
977 | 977 | ||
978 | CONFIG_LAN91C96 | 978 | CONFIG_LAN91C96 |
979 | Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips. | 979 | Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips. |
980 | 980 | ||
981 | CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT | 981 | CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT |
982 | Define this to enable 32 bit addressing | 982 | Define this to enable 32 bit addressing |
983 | 983 | ||
984 | CONFIG_SMC91111 | 984 | CONFIG_SMC91111 |
985 | Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip | 985 | Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip |
986 | 986 | ||
987 | CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE | 987 | CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE |
988 | Define this to hold the physical address | 988 | Define this to hold the physical address |
989 | of the device (I/O space) | 989 | of the device (I/O space) |
990 | 990 | ||
991 | CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT | 991 | CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT |
992 | Define this if data bus is 32 bits | 992 | Define this if data bus is 32 bits |
993 | 993 | ||
994 | CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS | 994 | CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS |
995 | Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros | 995 | Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros |
996 | (some hardware wont work with macros) | 996 | (some hardware wont work with macros) |
997 | 997 | ||
998 | CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC | 998 | CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC |
999 | Support for davinci emac | 999 | Support for davinci emac |
1000 | 1000 | ||
1001 | CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT | 1001 | CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT |
1002 | Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs. | 1002 | Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs. |
1003 | 1003 | ||
1004 | CONFIG_FTGMAC100 | 1004 | CONFIG_FTGMAC100 |
1005 | Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet | 1005 | Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet |
1006 | 1006 | ||
1007 | CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA | 1007 | CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA |
1008 | Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY. | 1008 | Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY. |
1009 | Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY. | 1009 | Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY. |
1010 | If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur | 1010 | If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur |
1011 | wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or | 1011 | wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or |
1012 | useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit | 1012 | useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit |
1013 | control registers. This behavior won't affect the | 1013 | control registers. This behavior won't affect the |
1014 | correctnessof 10/100 link speed update. | 1014 | correctnessof 10/100 link speed update. |
1015 | 1015 | ||
1016 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER | 1016 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER |
1017 | Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller | 1017 | Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller |
1018 | 1018 | ||
1019 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT | 1019 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT |
1020 | Define the number of ports to be used | 1020 | Define the number of ports to be used |
1021 | 1021 | ||
1022 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR | 1022 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR |
1023 | Define the ETH PHY's address | 1023 | Define the ETH PHY's address |
1024 | 1024 | ||
1025 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK | 1025 | CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK |
1026 | If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush. | 1026 | If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush. |
1027 | 1027 | ||
1028 | - PWM Support: | 1028 | - PWM Support: |
1029 | CONFIG_PWM_IMX | 1029 | CONFIG_PWM_IMX |
1030 | Support for PWM module on the imx6. | 1030 | Support for PWM module on the imx6. |
1031 | 1031 | ||
1032 | - TPM Support: | 1032 | - TPM Support: |
1033 | CONFIG_TPM | 1033 | CONFIG_TPM |
1034 | Support TPM devices. | 1034 | Support TPM devices. |
1035 | 1035 | ||
1036 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON | 1036 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON |
1037 | Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device | 1037 | Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device |
1038 | per system is supported at this time. | 1038 | per system is supported at this time. |
1039 | 1039 | ||
1040 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION | 1040 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION |
1041 | Define the burst count bytes upper limit | 1041 | Define the burst count bytes upper limit |
1042 | 1042 | ||
1043 | CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24 | 1043 | CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24 |
1044 | Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support. | 1044 | Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support. |
1045 | 1045 | ||
1046 | CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C | 1046 | CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C |
1047 | Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices. | 1047 | Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices. |
1048 | Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C. | 1048 | Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C. |
1049 | 1049 | ||
1050 | CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI | 1050 | CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI |
1051 | Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices. | 1051 | Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices. |
1052 | Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI. | 1052 | Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI. |
1053 | 1053 | ||
1054 | CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI | 1054 | CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI |
1055 | Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support. | 1055 | Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support. |
1056 | 1056 | ||
1057 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC | 1057 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC |
1058 | Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device | 1058 | Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device |
1059 | per system is supported at this time. | 1059 | per system is supported at this time. |
1060 | 1060 | ||
1061 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS | 1061 | CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS |
1062 | Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped | 1062 | Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped |
1063 | to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at | 1063 | to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at |
1064 | 0xfed40000. | 1064 | 0xfed40000. |
1065 | 1065 | ||
1066 | CONFIG_TPM | 1066 | CONFIG_TPM |
1067 | Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides | 1067 | Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides |
1068 | functional interfaces to some TPM commands. | 1068 | functional interfaces to some TPM commands. |
1069 | Requires support for a TPM device. | 1069 | Requires support for a TPM device. |
1070 | 1070 | ||
1071 | CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS | 1071 | CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS |
1072 | Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library. | 1072 | Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library. |
1073 | Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1. | 1073 | Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1. |
1074 | 1074 | ||
1075 | - USB Support: | 1075 | - USB Support: |
1076 | At the moment only the UHCI host controller is | 1076 | At the moment only the UHCI host controller is |
1077 | supported (PIP405, MIP405); define | 1077 | supported (PIP405, MIP405); define |
1078 | CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it. | 1078 | CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it. |
1079 | define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard | 1079 | define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard |
1080 | and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB | 1080 | and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB |
1081 | storage devices. | 1081 | storage devices. |
1082 | Note: | 1082 | Note: |
1083 | Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives | 1083 | Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives |
1084 | (TEAC FD-05PUB). | 1084 | (TEAC FD-05PUB). |
1085 | 1085 | ||
1086 | CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the | 1086 | CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the |
1087 | txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset. | 1087 | txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset. |
1088 | 1088 | ||
1089 | CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2 | 1089 | CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2 |
1090 | HW module registers. | 1090 | HW module registers. |
1091 | 1091 | ||
1092 | - USB Device: | 1092 | - USB Device: |
1093 | Define the below if you wish to use the USB console. | 1093 | Define the below if you wish to use the USB console. |
1094 | Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the | 1094 | Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the |
1095 | command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and | 1095 | command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and |
1096 | attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print | 1096 | attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print |
1097 | it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty | 1097 | it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty |
1098 | can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to | 1098 | can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to |
1099 | appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a | 1099 | appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a |
1100 | Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device. | 1100 | Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device. |
1101 | If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate | 1101 | If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate |
1102 | a Linux host by | 1102 | a Linux host by |
1103 | # modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID | 1103 | # modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID |
1104 | else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment | 1104 | else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment |
1105 | variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following | 1105 | variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following |
1106 | might be defined in YourBoardName.h | 1106 | might be defined in YourBoardName.h |
1107 | 1107 | ||
1108 | CONFIG_USB_DEVICE | 1108 | CONFIG_USB_DEVICE |
1109 | Define this to build a UDC device | 1109 | Define this to build a UDC device |
1110 | 1110 | ||
1111 | CONFIG_USB_TTY | 1111 | CONFIG_USB_TTY |
1112 | Define this to have a tty type of device available to | 1112 | Define this to have a tty type of device available to |
1113 | talk to the UDC device | 1113 | talk to the UDC device |
1114 | 1114 | ||
1115 | CONFIG_USBD_HS | 1115 | CONFIG_USBD_HS |
1116 | Define this to enable the high speed support for usb | 1116 | Define this to enable the high speed support for usb |
1117 | device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine | 1117 | device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine |
1118 | int is_usbd_high_speed(void) | 1118 | int is_usbd_high_speed(void) |
1119 | also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll | 1119 | also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll |
1120 | whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full | 1120 | whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full |
1121 | speed. | 1121 | speed. |
1122 | 1122 | ||
1123 | CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV | 1123 | CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV |
1124 | Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to | 1124 | Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to |
1125 | be set to usbtty. | 1125 | be set to usbtty. |
1126 | 1126 | ||
1127 | If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to | 1127 | If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to |
1128 | define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h | 1128 | define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h |
1129 | or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define | 1129 | or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define |
1130 | CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME, | 1130 | CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME, |
1131 | CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot | 1131 | CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot |
1132 | should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host. | 1132 | should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host. |
1133 | 1133 | ||
1134 | CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER | 1134 | CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER |
1135 | Define this string as the name of your company for | 1135 | Define this string as the name of your company for |
1136 | - CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company" | 1136 | - CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company" |
1137 | 1137 | ||
1138 | CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME | 1138 | CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME |
1139 | Define this string as the name of your product | 1139 | Define this string as the name of your product |
1140 | - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device" | 1140 | - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device" |
1141 | 1141 | ||
1142 | CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID | 1142 | CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID |
1143 | Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB | 1143 | Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB |
1144 | Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID | 1144 | Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID |
1145 | to avoid polluting the USB namespace. | 1145 | to avoid polluting the USB namespace. |
1146 | - CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF | 1146 | - CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF |
1147 | 1147 | ||
1148 | CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID | 1148 | CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID |
1149 | Define this as the unique Product ID | 1149 | Define this as the unique Product ID |
1150 | for your device | 1150 | for your device |
1151 | - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF | 1151 | - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF |
1152 | 1152 | ||
1153 | - ULPI Layer Support: | 1153 | - ULPI Layer Support: |
1154 | The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via | 1154 | The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via |
1155 | the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY | 1155 | the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY |
1156 | via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and | 1156 | via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and |
1157 | the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based | 1157 | the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based |
1158 | viewport is supported. | 1158 | viewport is supported. |
1159 | To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and | 1159 | To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and |
1160 | CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file. | 1160 | CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file. |
1161 | If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the | 1161 | If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the |
1162 | standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to | 1162 | standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to |
1163 | the appropriate value in Hz. | 1163 | the appropriate value in Hz. |
1164 | 1164 | ||
1165 | - MMC Support: | 1165 | - MMC Support: |
1166 | The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To | 1166 | The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To |
1167 | enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be | 1167 | enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be |
1168 | accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device | 1168 | accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device |
1169 | to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is | 1169 | to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is |
1170 | enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with | 1170 | enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with |
1171 | the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT. | 1171 | the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT. |
1172 | 1172 | ||
1173 | CONFIG_SH_MMCIF | 1173 | CONFIG_SH_MMCIF |
1174 | Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller | 1174 | Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller |
1175 | 1175 | ||
1176 | CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR | 1176 | CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR |
1177 | Define the base address of MMCIF registers | 1177 | Define the base address of MMCIF registers |
1178 | 1178 | ||
1179 | CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK | 1179 | CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK |
1180 | Define the clock frequency for MMCIF | 1180 | Define the clock frequency for MMCIF |
1181 | 1181 | ||
1182 | CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT | 1182 | CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT |
1183 | Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions. | 1183 | Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions. |
1184 | 1184 | ||
1185 | CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB | 1185 | CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB |
1186 | Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the | 1186 | Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the |
1187 | key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC. | 1187 | key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC. |
1188 | 1188 | ||
1189 | - USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support: | 1189 | - USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support: |
1190 | CONFIG_DFU_OVER_USB | 1190 | CONFIG_DFU_OVER_USB |
1191 | This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class | 1191 | This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class |
1192 | 1192 | ||
1193 | CONFIG_DFU_MMC | 1193 | CONFIG_DFU_MMC |
1194 | This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU. | 1194 | This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU. |
1195 | 1195 | ||
1196 | CONFIG_DFU_NAND | 1196 | CONFIG_DFU_NAND |
1197 | This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU. | 1197 | This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU. |
1198 | 1198 | ||
1199 | CONFIG_DFU_RAM | 1199 | CONFIG_DFU_RAM |
1200 | This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU. | 1200 | This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU. |
1201 | Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but | 1201 | Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but |
1202 | allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage, | 1202 | allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage, |
1203 | one that would help mostly the developer. | 1203 | one that would help mostly the developer. |
1204 | 1204 | ||
1205 | CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE | 1205 | CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE |
1206 | Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the | 1206 | Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the |
1207 | raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer | 1207 | raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer |
1208 | configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable | 1208 | configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable |
1209 | through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable. | 1209 | through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable. |
1210 | 1210 | ||
1211 | CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE | 1211 | CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE |
1212 | When updating files rather than the raw storage device, | 1212 | When updating files rather than the raw storage device, |
1213 | we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write | 1213 | we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write |
1214 | the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define | 1214 | the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define |
1215 | this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer. | 1215 | this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer. |
1216 | Default is 4 MiB if undefined. | 1216 | Default is 4 MiB if undefined. |
1217 | 1217 | ||
1218 | DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT | 1218 | DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT |
1219 | Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the | 1219 | Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the |
1220 | host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending | 1220 | host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending |
1221 | a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device. | 1221 | a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device. |
1222 | 1222 | ||
1223 | DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT | 1223 | DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT |
1224 | Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when | 1224 | Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when |
1225 | entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before | 1225 | entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before |
1226 | sending again an USB request to the device. | 1226 | sending again an USB request to the device. |
1227 | 1227 | ||
1228 | - Journaling Flash filesystem support: | 1228 | - Journaling Flash filesystem support: |
1229 | CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND | 1229 | CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND |
1230 | Define these for a default partition on a NAND device | 1230 | Define these for a default partition on a NAND device |
1231 | 1231 | ||
1232 | CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR, | 1232 | CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR, |
1233 | CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS | 1233 | CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS |
1234 | Define these for a default partition on a NOR device | 1234 | Define these for a default partition on a NOR device |
1235 | 1235 | ||
1236 | - Keyboard Support: | 1236 | - Keyboard Support: |
1237 | See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers. | 1237 | See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers. |
1238 | 1238 | ||
1239 | CONFIG_KEYBOARD | 1239 | CONFIG_KEYBOARD |
1240 | 1240 | ||
1241 | Define this to enable a custom keyboard support. | 1241 | Define this to enable a custom keyboard support. |
1242 | This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be | 1242 | This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be |
1243 | defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated | 1243 | defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated |
1244 | and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model | 1244 | and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model |
1245 | instead. | 1245 | instead. |
1246 | 1246 | ||
1247 | - Video support: | 1247 | - Video support: |
1248 | CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB | 1248 | CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB |
1249 | Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for | 1249 | Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for |
1250 | SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU | 1250 | SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU |
1251 | support, and should also define these other macros: | 1251 | support, and should also define these other macros: |
1252 | 1252 | ||
1253 | CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR | 1253 | CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR |
1254 | CONFIG_VIDEO | 1254 | CONFIG_VIDEO |
1255 | CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE | 1255 | CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE |
1256 | CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR | 1256 | CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR |
1257 | CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE | 1257 | CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE |
1258 | CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO | 1258 | CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO |
1259 | CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO | 1259 | CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO |
1260 | 1260 | ||
1261 | The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment | 1261 | The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment |
1262 | variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during | 1262 | variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during |
1263 | boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a | 1263 | boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a |
1264 | description of this variable. | 1264 | description of this variable. |
1265 | 1265 | ||
1266 | - LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD | 1266 | - LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD |
1267 | 1267 | ||
1268 | Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD | 1268 | Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD |
1269 | display); also select one of the supported displays | 1269 | display); also select one of the supported displays |
1270 | by defining one of these: | 1270 | by defining one of these: |
1271 | 1271 | ||
1272 | CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD: | 1272 | CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD: |
1273 | 1273 | ||
1274 | HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320. | 1274 | HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320. |
1275 | 1275 | ||
1276 | CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33: | 1276 | CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33: |
1277 | 1277 | ||
1278 | NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan. | 1278 | NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan. |
1279 | 1279 | ||
1280 | CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20 | 1280 | CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20 |
1281 | 1281 | ||
1282 | NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480. | 1282 | NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480. |
1283 | Active, color, single scan. | 1283 | Active, color, single scan. |
1284 | 1284 | ||
1285 | CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54 | 1285 | CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54 |
1286 | 1286 | ||
1287 | NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480. | 1287 | NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480. |
1288 | Active, color, single scan. | 1288 | Active, color, single scan. |
1289 | 1289 | ||
1290 | CONFIG_SHARP_16x9 | 1290 | CONFIG_SHARP_16x9 |
1291 | 1291 | ||
1292 | Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan. | 1292 | Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan. |
1293 | It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is. | 1293 | It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is. |
1294 | 1294 | ||
1295 | CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341 | 1295 | CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341 |
1296 | 1296 | ||
1297 | Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480. | 1297 | Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480. |
1298 | Active, color, single scan. | 1298 | Active, color, single scan. |
1299 | 1299 | ||
1300 | CONFIG_HLD1045 | 1300 | CONFIG_HLD1045 |
1301 | 1301 | ||
1302 | HLD1045 display, 640x480. | 1302 | HLD1045 display, 640x480. |
1303 | Active, color, single scan. | 1303 | Active, color, single scan. |
1304 | 1304 | ||
1305 | CONFIG_OPTREX_BW | 1305 | CONFIG_OPTREX_BW |
1306 | 1306 | ||
1307 | Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5 | 1307 | Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5 |
1308 | or | 1308 | or |
1309 | Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T | 1309 | Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T |
1310 | or | 1310 | or |
1311 | Hitachi SP14Q002 | 1311 | Hitachi SP14Q002 |
1312 | 1312 | ||
1313 | 320x240. Black & white. | 1313 | 320x240. Black & white. |
1314 | 1314 | ||
1315 | CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT | 1315 | CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT |
1316 | 1316 | ||
1317 | Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is | 1317 | Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is |
1318 | defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead. | 1318 | defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead. |
1319 | For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE | 1319 | For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE |
1320 | here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on | 1320 | here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on |
1321 | a per-section basis. | 1321 | a per-section basis. |
1322 | 1322 | ||
1323 | 1323 | ||
1324 | CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION | 1324 | CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION |
1325 | 1325 | ||
1326 | Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait | 1326 | Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait |
1327 | mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree, | 1327 | mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree, |
1328 | we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the | 1328 | we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the |
1329 | framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are | 1329 | framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are |
1330 | printed out. | 1330 | printed out. |
1331 | Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be | 1331 | Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be |
1332 | initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of | 1332 | initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of |
1333 | "vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code. | 1333 | "vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code. |
1334 | The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to | 1334 | The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to |
1335 | fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline): | 1335 | fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline): |
1336 | 0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree | 1336 | 0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree |
1337 | 1 = 90 degree rotation | 1337 | 1 = 90 degree rotation |
1338 | 2 = 180 degree rotation | 1338 | 2 = 180 degree rotation |
1339 | 3 = 270 degree rotation | 1339 | 3 = 270 degree rotation |
1340 | 1340 | ||
1341 | If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be | 1341 | If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be |
1342 | initialized with 0degree rotation. | 1342 | initialized with 0degree rotation. |
1343 | 1343 | ||
1344 | CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8 | 1344 | CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8 |
1345 | 1345 | ||
1346 | Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD. | 1346 | Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD. |
1347 | 1347 | ||
1348 | CONFIG_I2C_EDID | 1348 | CONFIG_I2C_EDID |
1349 | 1349 | ||
1350 | Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID | 1350 | Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID |
1351 | information over I2C from an attached LCD display. | 1351 | information over I2C from an attached LCD display. |
1352 | 1352 | ||
1353 | - Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN | 1353 | - Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN |
1354 | 1354 | ||
1355 | If this option is set, the environment is checked for | 1355 | If this option is set, the environment is checked for |
1356 | a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display | 1356 | a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display |
1357 | of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD | 1357 | of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD |
1358 | is suppressed and the BMP image at the address | 1358 | is suppressed and the BMP image at the address |
1359 | specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The | 1359 | specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The |
1360 | console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This | 1360 | console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This |
1361 | allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is | 1361 | allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is |
1362 | loaded very quickly after power-on. | 1362 | loaded very quickly after power-on. |
1363 | 1363 | ||
1364 | CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD | 1364 | CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD |
1365 | 1365 | ||
1366 | If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment | 1366 | If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment |
1367 | variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address | 1367 | variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address |
1368 | (see doc/README.displaying-bmps). | 1368 | (see doc/README.displaying-bmps). |
1369 | This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment | 1369 | This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment |
1370 | restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data | 1370 | restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data |
1371 | abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned | 1371 | abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned |
1372 | accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them) | 1372 | accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them) |
1373 | there is no need to set this option. | 1373 | there is no need to set this option. |
1374 | 1374 | ||
1375 | CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN | 1375 | CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN |
1376 | 1376 | ||
1377 | If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned | 1377 | If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned |
1378 | on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the | 1378 | on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the |
1379 | position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as | 1379 | position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as |
1380 | number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it | 1380 | number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it |
1381 | is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also | 1381 | is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also |
1382 | specify 'm' for centering the image. | 1382 | specify 'm' for centering the image. |
1383 | 1383 | ||
1384 | Example: | 1384 | Example: |
1385 | setenv splashpos m,m | 1385 | setenv splashpos m,m |
1386 | => image at center of screen | 1386 | => image at center of screen |
1387 | 1387 | ||
1388 | setenv splashpos 30,20 | 1388 | setenv splashpos 30,20 |
1389 | => image at x = 30 and y = 20 | 1389 | => image at x = 30 and y = 20 |
1390 | 1390 | ||
1391 | setenv splashpos -10,m | 1391 | setenv splashpos -10,m |
1392 | => vertically centered image | 1392 | => vertically centered image |
1393 | at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9 | 1393 | at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9 |
1394 | 1394 | ||
1395 | - Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP | 1395 | - Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP |
1396 | 1396 | ||
1397 | If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP | 1397 | If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP |
1398 | images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the | 1398 | images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the |
1399 | splashscreen support or the bmp command. | 1399 | splashscreen support or the bmp command. |
1400 | 1400 | ||
1401 | - Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8 | 1401 | - Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8 |
1402 | 1402 | ||
1403 | If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images | 1403 | If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images |
1404 | can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the | 1404 | can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the |
1405 | bmp command. | 1405 | bmp command. |
1406 | 1406 | ||
1407 | - Compression support: | 1407 | - Compression support: |
1408 | CONFIG_GZIP | 1408 | CONFIG_GZIP |
1409 | 1409 | ||
1410 | Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images. | 1410 | Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images. |
1411 | 1411 | ||
1412 | CONFIG_BZIP2 | 1412 | CONFIG_BZIP2 |
1413 | 1413 | ||
1414 | If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed | 1414 | If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed |
1415 | images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip | 1415 | images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip |
1416 | compressed images are supported. | 1416 | compressed images are supported. |
1417 | 1417 | ||
1418 | NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so | 1418 | NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so |
1419 | the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should | 1419 | the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should |
1420 | be at least 4MB. | 1420 | be at least 4MB. |
1421 | 1421 | ||
1422 | - MII/PHY support: | 1422 | - MII/PHY support: |
1423 | CONFIG_PHY_ADDR | 1423 | CONFIG_PHY_ADDR |
1424 | 1424 | ||
1425 | The address of PHY on MII bus. | 1425 | The address of PHY on MII bus. |
1426 | 1426 | ||
1427 | CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx) | 1427 | CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx) |
1428 | 1428 | ||
1429 | The clock frequency of the MII bus | 1429 | The clock frequency of the MII bus |
1430 | 1430 | ||
1431 | CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY | 1431 | CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY |
1432 | 1432 | ||
1433 | Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after | 1433 | Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after |
1434 | reset before any MII register access is possible. | 1434 | reset before any MII register access is possible. |
1435 | For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay | 1435 | For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay |
1436 | required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A) | 1436 | required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A) |
1437 | 1437 | ||
1438 | CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx) | 1438 | CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx) |
1439 | 1439 | ||
1440 | Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after | 1440 | Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after |
1441 | command issued before MII status register can be read | 1441 | command issued before MII status register can be read |
1442 | 1442 | ||
1443 | - IP address: | 1443 | - IP address: |
1444 | CONFIG_IPADDR | 1444 | CONFIG_IPADDR |
1445 | 1445 | ||
1446 | Define a default value for the IP address to use for | 1446 | Define a default value for the IP address to use for |
1447 | the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not | 1447 | the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not |
1448 | determined through e.g. bootp. | 1448 | determined through e.g. bootp. |
1449 | (Environment variable "ipaddr") | 1449 | (Environment variable "ipaddr") |
1450 | 1450 | ||
1451 | - Server IP address: | 1451 | - Server IP address: |
1452 | CONFIG_SERVERIP | 1452 | CONFIG_SERVERIP |
1453 | 1453 | ||
1454 | Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP | 1454 | Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP |
1455 | server to contact when using the "tftboot" command. | 1455 | server to contact when using the "tftboot" command. |
1456 | (Environment variable "serverip") | 1456 | (Environment variable "serverip") |
1457 | 1457 | ||
1458 | CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR | 1458 | CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR |
1459 | 1459 | ||
1460 | Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr' | 1460 | Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr' |
1461 | for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option) | 1461 | for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option) |
1462 | 1462 | ||
1463 | - Gateway IP address: | 1463 | - Gateway IP address: |
1464 | CONFIG_GATEWAYIP | 1464 | CONFIG_GATEWAYIP |
1465 | 1465 | ||
1466 | Defines a default value for the IP address of the | 1466 | Defines a default value for the IP address of the |
1467 | default router where packets to other networks are | 1467 | default router where packets to other networks are |
1468 | sent to. | 1468 | sent to. |
1469 | (Environment variable "gatewayip") | 1469 | (Environment variable "gatewayip") |
1470 | 1470 | ||
1471 | - Subnet mask: | 1471 | - Subnet mask: |
1472 | CONFIG_NETMASK | 1472 | CONFIG_NETMASK |
1473 | 1473 | ||
1474 | Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or | 1474 | Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or |
1475 | routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP | 1475 | routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP |
1476 | address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be | 1476 | address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be |
1477 | forwarded through a router. | 1477 | forwarded through a router. |
1478 | (Environment variable "netmask") | 1478 | (Environment variable "netmask") |
1479 | 1479 | ||
1480 | - Multicast TFTP Mode: | 1480 | - Multicast TFTP Mode: |
1481 | CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP | 1481 | CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP |
1482 | 1482 | ||
1483 | Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per | 1483 | Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per |
1484 | rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp. Lets lots of targets | 1484 | rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp. Lets lots of targets |
1485 | tftp down the same boot image concurrently. Note: the Ethernet | 1485 | tftp down the same boot image concurrently. Note: the Ethernet |
1486 | driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a | 1486 | driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a |
1487 | multicast group. | 1487 | multicast group. |
1488 | 1488 | ||
1489 | - BOOTP Recovery Mode: | 1489 | - BOOTP Recovery Mode: |
1490 | CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY | 1490 | CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY |
1491 | 1491 | ||
1492 | If you have many targets in a network that try to | 1492 | If you have many targets in a network that try to |
1493 | boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all | 1493 | boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all |
1494 | systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same | 1494 | systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same |
1495 | moment (which would happen for instance at recovery | 1495 | moment (which would happen for instance at recovery |
1496 | from a power failure, when all systems will try to | 1496 | from a power failure, when all systems will try to |
1497 | boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining | 1497 | boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining |
1498 | CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be | 1498 | CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be |
1499 | inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The | 1499 | inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The |
1500 | following delays are inserted then: | 1500 | following delays are inserted then: |
1501 | 1501 | ||
1502 | 1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec | 1502 | 1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec |
1503 | 2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec | 1503 | 2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec |
1504 | 3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec | 1504 | 3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec |
1505 | 4th and following | 1505 | 4th and following |
1506 | BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec | 1506 | BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec |
1507 | 1507 | ||
1508 | CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE | 1508 | CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE |
1509 | 1509 | ||
1510 | BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The | 1510 | BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The |
1511 | server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and | 1511 | server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and |
1512 | U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of | 1512 | U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of |
1513 | an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses | 1513 | an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses |
1514 | aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP | 1514 | aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP |
1515 | ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to | 1515 | ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to |
1516 | respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it | 1516 | respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it |
1517 | takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that | 1517 | takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that |
1518 | time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order | 1518 | time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order |
1519 | to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these | 1519 | to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these |
1520 | retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of | 1520 | retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of |
1521 | IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this | 1521 | IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this |
1522 | cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding | 1522 | cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding |
1523 | requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers | 1523 | requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers |
1524 | from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency. | 1524 | from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency. |
1525 | 1525 | ||
1526 | - DHCP Advanced Options: | 1526 | - DHCP Advanced Options: |
1527 | You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining | 1527 | You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining |
1528 | CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols: | 1528 | CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols: |
1529 | 1529 | ||
1530 | CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN | 1530 | CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN |
1531 | CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE | 1531 | CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE |
1532 | CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME | 1532 | CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME |
1533 | CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER | 1533 | CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER |
1534 | CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET | 1534 | CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET |
1535 | CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX | 1535 | CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX |
1536 | CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL | 1536 | CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL |
1537 | 1537 | ||
1538 | CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip | 1538 | CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip |
1539 | environment variable, not the BOOTP server. | 1539 | environment variable, not the BOOTP server. |
1540 | 1540 | ||
1541 | CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found | 1541 | CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found |
1542 | after the configured retry count, the call will fail | 1542 | after the configured retry count, the call will fail |
1543 | instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over | 1543 | instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over |
1544 | to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server | 1544 | to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server |
1545 | is not available. | 1545 | is not available. |
1546 | 1546 | ||
1547 | CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable | 1547 | CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable |
1548 | to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they | 1548 | to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they |
1549 | need the hostname of the DHCP requester. | 1549 | need the hostname of the DHCP requester. |
1550 | If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content | 1550 | If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content |
1551 | of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as | 1551 | of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as |
1552 | option 12 to the DHCP server. | 1552 | option 12 to the DHCP server. |
1553 | 1553 | ||
1554 | CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY | 1554 | CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY |
1555 | 1555 | ||
1556 | A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between | 1556 | A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between |
1557 | receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request". | 1557 | receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request". |
1558 | This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't | 1558 | This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't |
1559 | respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an | 1559 | respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an |
1560 | AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed | 1560 | AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed |
1561 | to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003 | 1561 | to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003 |
1562 | DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at | 1562 | DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at |
1563 | least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope | 1563 | least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope |
1564 | that one of the retries will be successful but note that | 1564 | that one of the retries will be successful but note that |
1565 | the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than | 1565 | the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than |
1566 | this delay. | 1566 | this delay. |
1567 | 1567 | ||
1568 | - Link-local IP address negotiation: | 1568 | - Link-local IP address negotiation: |
1569 | Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network | 1569 | Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network |
1570 | for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration. | 1570 | for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration. |
1571 | This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed | 1571 | This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed |
1572 | to exist in all environments that the device must operate. | 1572 | to exist in all environments that the device must operate. |
1573 | 1573 | ||
1574 | See doc/README.link-local for more information. | 1574 | See doc/README.link-local for more information. |
1575 | 1575 | ||
1576 | - MAC address from environment variables | 1576 | - MAC address from environment variables |
1577 | 1577 | ||
1578 | FDT_SEQ_MACADDR_FROM_ENV | 1578 | FDT_SEQ_MACADDR_FROM_ENV |
1579 | 1579 | ||
1580 | Fix-up device tree with MAC addresses fetched sequentially from | 1580 | Fix-up device tree with MAC addresses fetched sequentially from |
1581 | environment variables. This config work on assumption that | 1581 | environment variables. This config work on assumption that |
1582 | non-usable ethernet node of device-tree are either not present | 1582 | non-usable ethernet node of device-tree are either not present |
1583 | or their status has been marked as "disabled". | 1583 | or their status has been marked as "disabled". |
1584 | 1584 | ||
1585 | - CDP Options: | 1585 | - CDP Options: |
1586 | CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID | 1586 | CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID |
1587 | 1587 | ||
1588 | The device id used in CDP trigger frames. | 1588 | The device id used in CDP trigger frames. |
1589 | 1589 | ||
1590 | CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX | 1590 | CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX |
1591 | 1591 | ||
1592 | A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address | 1592 | A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address |
1593 | of the device. | 1593 | of the device. |
1594 | 1594 | ||
1595 | CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID | 1595 | CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID |
1596 | 1596 | ||
1597 | A printf format string which contains the ascii name of | 1597 | A printf format string which contains the ascii name of |
1598 | the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets | 1598 | the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets |
1599 | eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc. | 1599 | eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc. |
1600 | 1600 | ||
1601 | CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES | 1601 | CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES |
1602 | 1602 | ||
1603 | A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities; | 1603 | A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities; |
1604 | 0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards. | 1604 | 0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards. |
1605 | 1605 | ||
1606 | CONFIG_CDP_VERSION | 1606 | CONFIG_CDP_VERSION |
1607 | 1607 | ||
1608 | An ascii string containing the version of the software. | 1608 | An ascii string containing the version of the software. |
1609 | 1609 | ||
1610 | CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM | 1610 | CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM |
1611 | 1611 | ||
1612 | An ascii string containing the name of the platform. | 1612 | An ascii string containing the name of the platform. |
1613 | 1613 | ||
1614 | CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER | 1614 | CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER |
1615 | 1615 | ||
1616 | A 32bit integer sent on the trigger. | 1616 | A 32bit integer sent on the trigger. |
1617 | 1617 | ||
1618 | CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION | 1618 | CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION |
1619 | 1619 | ||
1620 | A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the | 1620 | A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the |
1621 | device in .1 of milliwatts. | 1621 | device in .1 of milliwatts. |
1622 | 1622 | ||
1623 | CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE | 1623 | CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE |
1624 | 1624 | ||
1625 | A byte containing the id of the VLAN. | 1625 | A byte containing the id of the VLAN. |
1626 | 1626 | ||
1627 | - Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS | 1627 | - Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS |
1628 | 1628 | ||
1629 | Several configurations allow to display the current | 1629 | Several configurations allow to display the current |
1630 | status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink | 1630 | status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink |
1631 | fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as | 1631 | fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as |
1632 | soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and | 1632 | soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and |
1633 | start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running | 1633 | start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running |
1634 | (supported by a status LED driver in the Linux | 1634 | (supported by a status LED driver in the Linux |
1635 | kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this | 1635 | kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this |
1636 | feature in U-Boot. | 1636 | feature in U-Boot. |
1637 | 1637 | ||
1638 | Additional options: | 1638 | Additional options: |
1639 | 1639 | ||
1640 | CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO | 1640 | CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO |
1641 | The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin. | 1641 | The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin. |
1642 | In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a | 1642 | In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a |
1643 | status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO | 1643 | status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO |
1644 | to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary. | 1644 | to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary. |
1645 | 1645 | ||
1646 | CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE | 1646 | CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE |
1647 | Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which | 1647 | Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which |
1648 | case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and | 1648 | case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and |
1649 | GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state. | 1649 | GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state. |
1650 | In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined | 1650 | In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined |
1651 | with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity. | 1651 | with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity. |
1652 | 1652 | ||
1653 | - I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C | 1653 | - I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C |
1654 | 1654 | ||
1655 | This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use | 1655 | This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use |
1656 | i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set | 1656 | i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set |
1657 | CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c | 1657 | CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c |
1658 | based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See | 1658 | based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See |
1659 | common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line | 1659 | common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line |
1660 | interface. | 1660 | interface. |
1661 | 1661 | ||
1662 | ported i2c driver to the new framework: | 1662 | ported i2c driver to the new framework: |
1663 | - drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c: | 1663 | - drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c: |
1664 | - activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define | 1664 | - activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define |
1665 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE | 1665 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE |
1666 | for defining speed and slave address | 1666 | for defining speed and slave address |
1667 | - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define | 1667 | - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define |
1668 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2 | 1668 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2 |
1669 | for defining speed and slave address | 1669 | for defining speed and slave address |
1670 | - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define | 1670 | - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define |
1671 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3 | 1671 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3 |
1672 | for defining speed and slave address | 1672 | for defining speed and slave address |
1673 | - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define | 1673 | - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define |
1674 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4 | 1674 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4 |
1675 | for defining speed and slave address | 1675 | for defining speed and slave address |
1676 | 1676 | ||
1677 | - drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c: | 1677 | - drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c: |
1678 | - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL | 1678 | - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL |
1679 | define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register | 1679 | define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register |
1680 | offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and | 1680 | offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and |
1681 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first | 1681 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first |
1682 | bus. | 1682 | bus. |
1683 | - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define | 1683 | - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define |
1684 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset | 1684 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset |
1685 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and | 1685 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and |
1686 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the | 1686 | CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the |
1687 | second bus. | 1687 | second bus. |
1688 | 1688 | ||
1689 | - drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c: | 1689 | - drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c: |
1690 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA | 1690 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA |
1691 | - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from | 1691 | - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from |
1692 | 100000 and the slave addr 0! | 1692 | 100000 and the slave addr 0! |
1693 | 1693 | ||
1694 | - drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c | 1694 | - drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c |
1695 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX | 1695 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX |
1696 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 | 1696 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 |
1697 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 | 1697 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 |
1698 | 1698 | ||
1699 | - drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c | 1699 | - drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c |
1700 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC | 1700 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC |
1701 | - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1 | 1701 | - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1 |
1702 | - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2 | 1702 | - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2 |
1703 | - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3 | 1703 | - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3 |
1704 | - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4 | 1704 | - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4 |
1705 | - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED | 1705 | - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED |
1706 | - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE | 1706 | - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE |
1707 | - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED | 1707 | - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED |
1708 | - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE | 1708 | - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE |
1709 | - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED | 1709 | - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED |
1710 | - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE | 1710 | - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE |
1711 | - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED | 1711 | - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED |
1712 | - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE | 1712 | - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE |
1713 | If those defines are not set, default value is 100000 | 1713 | If those defines are not set, default value is 100000 |
1714 | for speed, and 0 for slave. | 1714 | for speed, and 0 for slave. |
1715 | 1715 | ||
1716 | - drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c: | 1716 | - drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c: |
1717 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR | 1717 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR |
1718 | - This driver adds 4 i2c buses | 1718 | - This driver adds 4 i2c buses |
1719 | 1719 | ||
1720 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0 | 1720 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0 |
1721 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0 | 1721 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0 |
1722 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1 | 1722 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1 |
1723 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1 | 1723 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1 |
1724 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2 | 1724 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2 |
1725 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2 | 1725 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2 |
1726 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3 | 1726 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3 |
1727 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3 | 1727 | - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3 |
1728 | - CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses | 1728 | - CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses |
1729 | 1729 | ||
1730 | - drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c: | 1730 | - drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c: |
1731 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH | 1731 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH |
1732 | - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses | 1732 | - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses |
1733 | 1733 | ||
1734 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0 | 1734 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0 |
1735 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0 | 1735 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0 |
1736 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1 | 1736 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1 |
1737 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1 | 1737 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1 |
1738 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2 | 1738 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2 |
1739 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2 | 1739 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2 |
1740 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3 | 1740 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3 |
1741 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3 | 1741 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3 |
1742 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4 | 1742 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4 |
1743 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4 | 1743 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4 |
1744 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses | 1744 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses |
1745 | 1745 | ||
1746 | - drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c | 1746 | - drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c |
1747 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX | 1747 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX |
1748 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0 | 1748 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0 |
1749 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0 | 1749 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0 |
1750 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1 | 1750 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1 |
1751 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1 | 1751 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1 |
1752 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2 | 1752 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2 |
1753 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2 | 1753 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2 |
1754 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3 | 1754 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3 |
1755 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3 | 1755 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3 |
1756 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4 | 1756 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4 |
1757 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4 | 1757 | - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4 |
1758 | 1758 | ||
1759 | - drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c | 1759 | - drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c |
1760 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ | 1760 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ |
1761 | - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting | 1761 | - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting |
1762 | - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr | 1762 | - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr |
1763 | 1763 | ||
1764 | - drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c: | 1764 | - drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c: |
1765 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0 | 1765 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0 |
1766 | - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420 | 1766 | - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420 |
1767 | 9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung) | 1767 | 9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung) |
1768 | with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0! | 1768 | with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0! |
1769 | 1769 | ||
1770 | - drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c | 1770 | - drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c |
1771 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS | 1771 | - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS |
1772 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 | 1772 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 |
1773 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0 | 1773 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0 |
1774 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0 | 1774 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0 |
1775 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 | 1775 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 |
1776 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1 | 1776 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1 |
1777 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1 | 1777 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1 |
1778 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2 | 1778 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2 |
1779 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2 | 1779 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2 |
1780 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2 | 1780 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2 |
1781 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3 | 1781 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3 |
1782 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3 | 1782 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3 |
1783 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3 | 1783 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3 |
1784 | - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL | 1784 | - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL |
1785 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1 | 1785 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1 |
1786 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1 | 1786 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1 |
1787 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1 | 1787 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1 |
1788 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1 | 1788 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1 |
1789 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1 | 1789 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1 |
1790 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1 | 1790 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1 |
1791 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1 | 1791 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1 |
1792 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1 | 1792 | - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1 |
1793 | 1793 | ||
1794 | additional defines: | 1794 | additional defines: |
1795 | 1795 | ||
1796 | CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES | 1796 | CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES |
1797 | Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use. | 1797 | Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use. |
1798 | 1798 | ||
1799 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS | 1799 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS |
1800 | define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware. | 1800 | define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware. |
1801 | if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can | 1801 | if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can |
1802 | omit this define. | 1802 | omit this define. |
1803 | 1803 | ||
1804 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS | 1804 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS |
1805 | define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected | 1805 | define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected |
1806 | on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this | 1806 | on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this |
1807 | define. | 1807 | define. |
1808 | 1808 | ||
1809 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES | 1809 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES |
1810 | hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if | 1810 | hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if |
1811 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example | 1811 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example |
1812 | a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and | 1812 | a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and |
1813 | CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9: | 1813 | CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9: |
1814 | 1814 | ||
1815 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ | 1815 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ |
1816 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \ | 1816 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \ |
1817 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \ | 1817 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \ |
1818 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \ | 1818 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \ |
1819 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \ | 1819 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \ |
1820 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \ | 1820 | {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \ |
1821 | {1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ | 1821 | {1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ |
1822 | {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \ | 1822 | {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \ |
1823 | {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \ | 1823 | {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \ |
1824 | } | 1824 | } |
1825 | 1825 | ||
1826 | which defines | 1826 | which defines |
1827 | bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux | 1827 | bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux |
1828 | bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1 | 1828 | bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1 |
1829 | bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2 | 1829 | bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2 |
1830 | bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3 | 1830 | bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3 |
1831 | bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4 | 1831 | bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4 |
1832 | bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5 | 1832 | bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5 |
1833 | bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux | 1833 | bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux |
1834 | bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1 | 1834 | bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1 |
1835 | bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2 | 1835 | bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2 |
1836 | 1836 | ||
1837 | If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define. | 1837 | If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define. |
1838 | 1838 | ||
1839 | - Legacy I2C Support: | 1839 | - Legacy I2C Support: |
1840 | If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT) | 1840 | If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT) |
1841 | then the following macros need to be defined (examples are | 1841 | then the following macros need to be defined (examples are |
1842 | from include/configs/lwmon.h): | 1842 | from include/configs/lwmon.h): |
1843 | 1843 | ||
1844 | I2C_INIT | 1844 | I2C_INIT |
1845 | 1845 | ||
1846 | (Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C | 1846 | (Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C |
1847 | controller or configure ports. | 1847 | controller or configure ports. |
1848 | 1848 | ||
1849 | eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL) | 1849 | eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL) |
1850 | 1850 | ||
1851 | I2C_ACTIVE | 1851 | I2C_ACTIVE |
1852 | 1852 | ||
1853 | The code necessary to make the I2C data line active | 1853 | The code necessary to make the I2C data line active |
1854 | (driven). If the data line is open collector, this | 1854 | (driven). If the data line is open collector, this |
1855 | define can be null. | 1855 | define can be null. |
1856 | 1856 | ||
1857 | eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA) | 1857 | eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA) |
1858 | 1858 | ||
1859 | I2C_TRISTATE | 1859 | I2C_TRISTATE |
1860 | 1860 | ||
1861 | The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated | 1861 | The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated |
1862 | (inactive). If the data line is open collector, this | 1862 | (inactive). If the data line is open collector, this |
1863 | define can be null. | 1863 | define can be null. |
1864 | 1864 | ||
1865 | eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA) | 1865 | eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA) |
1866 | 1866 | ||
1867 | I2C_READ | 1867 | I2C_READ |
1868 | 1868 | ||
1869 | Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high, | 1869 | Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high, |
1870 | false if it is low. | 1870 | false if it is low. |
1871 | 1871 | ||
1872 | eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0) | 1872 | eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0) |
1873 | 1873 | ||
1874 | I2C_SDA(bit) | 1874 | I2C_SDA(bit) |
1875 | 1875 | ||
1876 | If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it | 1876 | If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it |
1877 | is false, it clears it (low). | 1877 | is false, it clears it (low). |
1878 | 1878 | ||
1879 | eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \ | 1879 | eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \ |
1880 | if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \ | 1880 | if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \ |
1881 | else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA | 1881 | else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA |
1882 | 1882 | ||
1883 | I2C_SCL(bit) | 1883 | I2C_SCL(bit) |
1884 | 1884 | ||
1885 | If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it | 1885 | If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it |
1886 | is false, it clears it (low). | 1886 | is false, it clears it (low). |
1887 | 1887 | ||
1888 | eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \ | 1888 | eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \ |
1889 | if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \ | 1889 | if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \ |
1890 | else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL | 1890 | else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL |
1891 | 1891 | ||
1892 | I2C_DELAY | 1892 | I2C_DELAY |
1893 | 1893 | ||
1894 | This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this | 1894 | This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this |
1895 | controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus | 1895 | controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus |
1896 | is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something | 1896 | is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something |
1897 | like: | 1897 | like: |
1898 | 1898 | ||
1899 | #define I2C_DELAY udelay(2) | 1899 | #define I2C_DELAY udelay(2) |
1900 | 1900 | ||
1901 | CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA | 1901 | CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA |
1902 | 1902 | ||
1903 | If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h), | 1903 | If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h), |
1904 | then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be | 1904 | then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be |
1905 | used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will | 1905 | used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will |
1906 | have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate. | 1906 | have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate. |
1907 | 1907 | ||
1908 | You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to | 1908 | You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to |
1909 | the generic GPIO functions. | 1909 | the generic GPIO functions. |
1910 | 1910 | ||
1911 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD | 1911 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD |
1912 | 1912 | ||
1913 | When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer | 1913 | When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer |
1914 | chips might think that the current transfer is still | 1914 | chips might think that the current transfer is still |
1915 | in progress. On some boards it is possible to access | 1915 | in progress. On some boards it is possible to access |
1916 | the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the | 1916 | the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the |
1917 | processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin | 1917 | processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin |
1918 | connected to the bus. If this option is defined a | 1918 | connected to the bus. If this option is defined a |
1919 | custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c | 1919 | custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c |
1920 | is run early in the boot sequence. | 1920 | is run early in the boot sequence. |
1921 | 1921 | ||
1922 | CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS | 1922 | CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS |
1923 | 1923 | ||
1924 | This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which | 1924 | This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which |
1925 | must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is | 1925 | must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is |
1926 | active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command. | 1926 | active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command. |
1927 | Note that bus numbering is zero-based. | 1927 | Note that bus numbering is zero-based. |
1928 | 1928 | ||
1929 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES | 1929 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES |
1930 | 1930 | ||
1931 | This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped | 1931 | This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped |
1932 | when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS | 1932 | when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS |
1933 | is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify | 1933 | is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify |
1934 | a 1D array of device addresses | 1934 | a 1D array of device addresses |
1935 | 1935 | ||
1936 | e.g. | 1936 | e.g. |
1937 | #undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS | 1937 | #undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS |
1938 | #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68} | 1938 | #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68} |
1939 | 1939 | ||
1940 | will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus | 1940 | will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus |
1941 | 1941 | ||
1942 | #define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS | 1942 | #define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS |
1943 | #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}} | 1943 | #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}} |
1944 | 1944 | ||
1945 | will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1 | 1945 | will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1 |
1946 | 1946 | ||
1947 | CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM | 1947 | CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM |
1948 | 1948 | ||
1949 | If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD. | 1949 | If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD. |
1950 | If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0. | 1950 | If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0. |
1951 | 1951 | ||
1952 | CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM | 1952 | CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM |
1953 | 1953 | ||
1954 | If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC. | 1954 | If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC. |
1955 | If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0. | 1955 | If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0. |
1956 | 1956 | ||
1957 | CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START | 1957 | CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START |
1958 | 1958 | ||
1959 | defining this will force the i2c_read() function in | 1959 | defining this will force the i2c_read() function in |
1960 | the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start | 1960 | the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start |
1961 | between writing the address pointer and reading the | 1961 | between writing the address pointer and reading the |
1962 | data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour | 1962 | data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour |
1963 | of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C | 1963 | of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C |
1964 | devices can use either method, but some require one or | 1964 | devices can use either method, but some require one or |
1965 | the other. | 1965 | the other. |
1966 | 1966 | ||
1967 | - SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI | 1967 | - SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI |
1968 | 1968 | ||
1969 | Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with | 1969 | Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with |
1970 | SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and | 1970 | SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and |
1971 | D/As on the SACSng board) | 1971 | D/As on the SACSng board) |
1972 | 1972 | ||
1973 | CONFIG_SOFT_SPI | 1973 | CONFIG_SOFT_SPI |
1974 | 1974 | ||
1975 | Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than | 1975 | Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than |
1976 | using hardware support. This is a general purpose | 1976 | using hardware support. This is a general purpose |
1977 | driver that only requires three general I/O port pins | 1977 | driver that only requires three general I/O port pins |
1978 | (two outputs, one input) to function. If this is | 1978 | (two outputs, one input) to function. If this is |
1979 | defined, the board configuration must define several | 1979 | defined, the board configuration must define several |
1980 | SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For | 1980 | SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For |
1981 | an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h. | 1981 | an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h. |
1982 | 1982 | ||
1983 | CONFIG_HARD_SPI | 1983 | CONFIG_HARD_SPI |
1984 | 1984 | ||
1985 | Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads | 1985 | Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads |
1986 | and writes. As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration | 1986 | and writes. As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration |
1987 | must define a list of chip-select function pointers. | 1987 | must define a list of chip-select function pointers. |
1988 | Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors. For an | 1988 | Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors. For an |
1989 | example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h. | 1989 | example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h. |
1990 | 1990 | ||
1991 | CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT | 1991 | CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT |
1992 | Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed. | 1992 | Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed. |
1993 | default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */ | 1993 | default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */ |
1994 | 1994 | ||
1995 | - FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA | 1995 | - FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA |
1996 | 1996 | ||
1997 | Enables FPGA subsystem. | 1997 | Enables FPGA subsystem. |
1998 | 1998 | ||
1999 | CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor> | 1999 | CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor> |
2000 | 2000 | ||
2001 | Enables support for specific chip vendors. | 2001 | Enables support for specific chip vendors. |
2002 | (ALTERA, XILINX) | 2002 | (ALTERA, XILINX) |
2003 | 2003 | ||
2004 | CONFIG_FPGA_<family> | 2004 | CONFIG_FPGA_<family> |
2005 | 2005 | ||
2006 | Enables support for FPGA family. | 2006 | Enables support for FPGA family. |
2007 | (SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX) | 2007 | (SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX) |
2008 | 2008 | ||
2009 | CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT | 2009 | CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT |
2010 | 2010 | ||
2011 | Specify the number of FPGA devices to support. | 2011 | Specify the number of FPGA devices to support. |
2012 | 2012 | ||
2013 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK | 2013 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK |
2014 | 2014 | ||
2015 | Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration. | 2015 | Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration. |
2016 | 2016 | ||
2017 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY | 2017 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY |
2018 | 2018 | ||
2019 | Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy | 2019 | Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy |
2020 | status by the configuration function. This option | 2020 | status by the configuration function. This option |
2021 | will require a board or device specific function to | 2021 | will require a board or device specific function to |
2022 | be written. | 2022 | be written. |
2023 | 2023 | ||
2024 | CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY | 2024 | CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY |
2025 | 2025 | ||
2026 | If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA | 2026 | If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA |
2027 | configuration driver. | 2027 | configuration driver. |
2028 | 2028 | ||
2029 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC | 2029 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC |
2030 | Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration | 2030 | Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration |
2031 | 2031 | ||
2032 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR | 2032 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR |
2033 | 2033 | ||
2034 | Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile | 2034 | Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile |
2035 | loading. For example, abort during Virtex II | 2035 | loading. For example, abort during Virtex II |
2036 | configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which | 2036 | configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which |
2037 | indicated a CRC error). | 2037 | indicated a CRC error). |
2038 | 2038 | ||
2039 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT | 2039 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT |
2040 | 2040 | ||
2041 | Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert | 2041 | Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert |
2042 | after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II | 2042 | after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II |
2043 | FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500 | 2043 | FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500 |
2044 | ms. | 2044 | ms. |
2045 | 2045 | ||
2046 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY | 2046 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY |
2047 | 2047 | ||
2048 | Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during | 2048 | Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during |
2049 | Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms. | 2049 | Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms. |
2050 | 2050 | ||
2051 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG | 2051 | CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG |
2052 | 2052 | ||
2053 | Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is | 2053 | Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is |
2054 | 200 ms. | 2054 | 200 ms. |
2055 | 2055 | ||
2056 | - Configuration Management: | 2056 | - Configuration Management: |
2057 | CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET | 2057 | CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET |
2058 | 2058 | ||
2059 | Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary | 2059 | Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary |
2060 | with a special header) as build targets. By defining | 2060 | with a special header) as build targets. By defining |
2061 | CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this | 2061 | CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this |
2062 | special image will be automatically built upon calling | 2062 | special image will be automatically built upon calling |
2063 | make / buildman. | 2063 | make / buildman. |
2064 | 2064 | ||
2065 | CONFIG_IDENT_STRING | 2065 | CONFIG_IDENT_STRING |
2066 | 2066 | ||
2067 | If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot | 2067 | If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot |
2068 | version information (U_BOOT_VERSION) | 2068 | version information (U_BOOT_VERSION) |
2069 | 2069 | ||
2070 | - Vendor Parameter Protection: | 2070 | - Vendor Parameter Protection: |
2071 | 2071 | ||
2072 | U-Boot considers the values of the environment | 2072 | U-Boot considers the values of the environment |
2073 | variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and | 2073 | variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and |
2074 | "ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that | 2074 | "ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that |
2075 | are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and | 2075 | are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and |
2076 | protects these variables from casual modification by | 2076 | protects these variables from casual modification by |
2077 | the user. Once set, these variables are read-only, | 2077 | the user. Once set, these variables are read-only, |
2078 | and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can | 2078 | and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can |
2079 | change this behaviour: | 2079 | change this behaviour: |
2080 | 2080 | ||
2081 | If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config | 2081 | If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config |
2082 | file, the write protection for vendor parameters is | 2082 | file, the write protection for vendor parameters is |
2083 | completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete | 2083 | completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete |
2084 | these parameters. | 2084 | these parameters. |
2085 | 2085 | ||
2086 | Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the | 2086 | Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the |
2087 | default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default | 2087 | default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default |
2088 | Ethernet address is installed in the environment, | 2088 | Ethernet address is installed in the environment, |
2089 | which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The | 2089 | which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The |
2090 | serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains | 2090 | serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains |
2091 | read-only.] | 2091 | read-only.] |
2092 | 2092 | ||
2093 | The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way | 2093 | The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way |
2094 | for any variable by configuring the type of access | 2094 | for any variable by configuring the type of access |
2095 | to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable | 2095 | to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable |
2096 | or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC. | 2096 | or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC. |
2097 | 2097 | ||
2098 | - Protected RAM: | 2098 | - Protected RAM: |
2099 | CONFIG_PRAM | 2099 | CONFIG_PRAM |
2100 | 2100 | ||
2101 | Define this variable to enable the reservation of | 2101 | Define this variable to enable the reservation of |
2102 | "protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten | 2102 | "protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten |
2103 | by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of | 2103 | by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of |
2104 | kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite | 2104 | kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite |
2105 | this default value by defining an environment | 2105 | this default value by defining an environment |
2106 | variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to | 2106 | variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to |
2107 | reserve. Note that the board info structure will | 2107 | reserve. Note that the board info structure will |
2108 | still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is | 2108 | still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is |
2109 | reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will | 2109 | reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will |
2110 | automatically be defined to hold the amount of | 2110 | automatically be defined to hold the amount of |
2111 | remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot | 2111 | remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot |
2112 | argument to Linux, for instance like that: | 2112 | argument to Linux, for instance like that: |
2113 | 2113 | ||
2114 | setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem} | 2114 | setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem} |
2115 | saveenv | 2115 | saveenv |
2116 | 2116 | ||
2117 | This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory, | 2117 | This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory, |
2118 | either, which results in a memory region that will | 2118 | either, which results in a memory region that will |
2119 | not be affected by reboots. | 2119 | not be affected by reboots. |
2120 | 2120 | ||
2121 | *WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic | 2121 | *WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic |
2122 | detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that | 2122 | detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that |
2123 | this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the | 2123 | this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the |
2124 | following board configurations are known to be | 2124 | following board configurations are known to be |
2125 | "pRAM-clean": | 2125 | "pRAM-clean": |
2126 | 2126 | ||
2127 | IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx, | 2127 | IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx, |
2128 | HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON, | 2128 | HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON, |
2129 | FLAGADM | 2129 | FLAGADM |
2130 | 2130 | ||
2131 | - Access to physical memory region (> 4GB) | 2131 | - Access to physical memory region (> 4GB) |
2132 | Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not | 2132 | Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not |
2133 | normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures | 2133 | normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures |
2134 | support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit | 2134 | support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit |
2135 | machines using physical address extension or similar. | 2135 | machines using physical address extension or similar. |
2136 | Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which | 2136 | Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which |
2137 | currently only supports clearing the memory. | 2137 | currently only supports clearing the memory. |
2138 | 2138 | ||
2139 | - Error Recovery: | 2139 | - Error Recovery: |
2140 | CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT | 2140 | CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT |
2141 | 2141 | ||
2142 | This variable defines the number of retries for | 2142 | This variable defines the number of retries for |
2143 | network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP | 2143 | network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP |
2144 | before giving up the operation. If not defined, a | 2144 | before giving up the operation. If not defined, a |
2145 | default value of 5 is used. | 2145 | default value of 5 is used. |
2146 | 2146 | ||
2147 | CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT | 2147 | CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT |
2148 | 2148 | ||
2149 | Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds. | 2149 | Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds. |
2150 | 2150 | ||
2151 | CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT | 2151 | CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT |
2152 | 2152 | ||
2153 | Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol. | 2153 | Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol. |
2154 | If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command, | 2154 | If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command, |
2155 | try longer timeout such as | 2155 | try longer timeout such as |
2156 | #define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL | 2156 | #define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL |
2157 | 2157 | ||
2158 | - Command Interpreter: | 2158 | - Command Interpreter: |
2159 | CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2 | 2159 | CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2 |
2160 | 2160 | ||
2161 | This defines the secondary prompt string, which is | 2161 | This defines the secondary prompt string, which is |
2162 | printed when the command interpreter needs more input | 2162 | printed when the command interpreter needs more input |
2163 | to complete a command. Usually "> ". | 2163 | to complete a command. Usually "> ". |
2164 | 2164 | ||
2165 | Note: | 2165 | Note: |
2166 | 2166 | ||
2167 | In the current implementation, the local variables | 2167 | In the current implementation, the local variables |
2168 | space and global environment variables space are | 2168 | space and global environment variables space are |
2169 | separated. Local variables are those you define by | 2169 | separated. Local variables are those you define by |
2170 | simply typing `name=value'. To access a local | 2170 | simply typing `name=value'. To access a local |
2171 | variable later on, you have write `$name' or | 2171 | variable later on, you have write `$name' or |
2172 | `${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable | 2172 | `${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable |
2173 | directly type `$name' at the command prompt. | 2173 | directly type `$name' at the command prompt. |
2174 | 2174 | ||
2175 | Global environment variables are those you use | 2175 | Global environment variables are those you use |
2176 | setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored | 2176 | setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored |
2177 | in such a variable, you need to use the run command, | 2177 | in such a variable, you need to use the run command, |
2178 | and you must not use the '$' sign to access them. | 2178 | and you must not use the '$' sign to access them. |
2179 | 2179 | ||
2180 | To store commands and special characters in a | 2180 | To store commands and special characters in a |
2181 | variable, please use double quotation marks | 2181 | variable, please use double quotation marks |
2182 | surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead | 2182 | surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead |
2183 | of the backslashes before semicolons and special | 2183 | of the backslashes before semicolons and special |
2184 | symbols. | 2184 | symbols. |
2185 | 2185 | ||
2186 | - Command Line Editing and History: | 2186 | - Command Line Editing and History: |
2187 | CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT | 2187 | CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT |
2188 | 2188 | ||
2189 | Enable support for changing the command prompt string | 2189 | Enable support for changing the command prompt string |
2190 | at run-time. Only static string is supported so far. | 2190 | at run-time. Only static string is supported so far. |
2191 | The string is obtained from environment variables PS1 | 2191 | The string is obtained from environment variables PS1 |
2192 | and PS2. | 2192 | and PS2. |
2193 | 2193 | ||
2194 | - Default Environment: | 2194 | - Default Environment: |
2195 | CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS | 2195 | CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS |
2196 | 2196 | ||
2197 | Define this to contain any number of null terminated | 2197 | Define this to contain any number of null terminated |
2198 | strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of | 2198 | strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of |
2199 | the default environment compiled into the boot image. | 2199 | the default environment compiled into the boot image. |
2200 | 2200 | ||
2201 | For example, place something like this in your | 2201 | For example, place something like this in your |
2202 | board's config file: | 2202 | board's config file: |
2203 | 2203 | ||
2204 | #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \ | 2204 | #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \ |
2205 | "myvar1=value1\0" \ | 2205 | "myvar1=value1\0" \ |
2206 | "myvar2=value2\0" | 2206 | "myvar2=value2\0" |
2207 | 2207 | ||
2208 | Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the | 2208 | Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the |
2209 | internal format how the environment is stored by the | 2209 | internal format how the environment is stored by the |
2210 | U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported | 2210 | U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported |
2211 | interface! Although it is unlikely that this format | 2211 | interface! Although it is unlikely that this format |
2212 | will change soon, there is no guarantee either. | 2212 | will change soon, there is no guarantee either. |
2213 | You better know what you are doing here. | 2213 | You better know what you are doing here. |
2214 | 2214 | ||
2215 | Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is | 2215 | Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is |
2216 | discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset | 2216 | discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset |
2217 | the environment like the "source" command or the | 2217 | the environment like the "source" command or the |
2218 | boot command first. | 2218 | boot command first. |
2219 | 2219 | ||
2220 | CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG | 2220 | CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG |
2221 | 2221 | ||
2222 | Define this in order to add variables describing certain | 2222 | Define this in order to add variables describing certain |
2223 | run-time determined information about the hardware to the | 2223 | run-time determined information about the hardware to the |
2224 | environment. These will be named board_name, board_rev. | 2224 | environment. These will be named board_name, board_rev. |
2225 | 2225 | ||
2226 | CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT | 2226 | CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT |
2227 | 2227 | ||
2228 | Normally the environment is loaded when the board is | 2228 | Normally the environment is loaded when the board is |
2229 | initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits | 2229 | initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits |
2230 | that so that the environment is not available until | 2230 | that so that the environment is not available until |
2231 | explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL | 2231 | explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL |
2232 | this is instead controlled by the value of | 2232 | this is instead controlled by the value of |
2233 | /config/load-environment. | 2233 | /config/load-environment. |
2234 | 2234 | ||
2235 | - Serial Flash support | 2235 | - Serial Flash support |
2236 | Usage requires an initial 'sf probe' to define the serial | 2236 | Usage requires an initial 'sf probe' to define the serial |
2237 | flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update | 2237 | flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update |
2238 | commands. | 2238 | commands. |
2239 | 2239 | ||
2240 | The following defaults may be provided by the platform | 2240 | The following defaults may be provided by the platform |
2241 | to handle the common case when only a single serial | 2241 | to handle the common case when only a single serial |
2242 | flash is present on the system. | 2242 | flash is present on the system. |
2243 | 2243 | ||
2244 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS Bus identifier | 2244 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS Bus identifier |
2245 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS Chip-select | 2245 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS Chip-select |
2246 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE (see include/spi.h) | 2246 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE (see include/spi.h) |
2247 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED in Hz | 2247 | CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED in Hz |
2248 | 2248 | ||
2249 | 2249 | ||
2250 | - TFTP Fixed UDP Port: | 2250 | - TFTP Fixed UDP Port: |
2251 | CONFIG_TFTP_PORT | 2251 | CONFIG_TFTP_PORT |
2252 | 2252 | ||
2253 | If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp | 2253 | If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp |
2254 | is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value. | 2254 | is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value. |
2255 | If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port | 2255 | If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port |
2256 | number generator is used. | 2256 | number generator is used. |
2257 | 2257 | ||
2258 | Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply | 2258 | Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply |
2259 | the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't | 2259 | the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't |
2260 | defined, the normal port 69 is used. | 2260 | defined, the normal port 69 is used. |
2261 | 2261 | ||
2262 | The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to | 2262 | The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to |
2263 | blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured | 2263 | blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured |
2264 | target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of | 2264 | target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of |
2265 | "punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing | 2265 | "punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing |
2266 | the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally. | 2266 | the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally. |
2267 | A better solution is to properly configure the firewall, | 2267 | A better solution is to properly configure the firewall, |
2268 | but sometimes that is not allowed. | 2268 | but sometimes that is not allowed. |
2269 | 2269 | ||
2270 | - bootcount support: | ||
2271 | CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE | ||
2272 | enable special bootcounter support on at91sam9xe based boards. | ||
2273 | |||
2274 | - Show boot progress: | 2270 | - Show boot progress: |
2275 | CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS | 2271 | CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS |
2276 | 2272 | ||
2277 | Defining this option allows to add some board- | 2273 | Defining this option allows to add some board- |
2278 | specific code (calling a user-provided function | 2274 | specific code (calling a user-provided function |
2279 | "show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show | 2275 | "show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show |
2280 | the system's boot progress on some display (for | 2276 | the system's boot progress on some display (for |
2281 | example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment, | 2277 | example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment, |
2282 | the following checkpoints are implemented: | 2278 | the following checkpoints are implemented: |
2283 | 2279 | ||
2284 | 2280 | ||
2285 | Legacy uImage format: | 2281 | Legacy uImage format: |
2286 | 2282 | ||
2287 | Arg Where When | 2283 | Arg Where When |
2288 | 1 common/cmd_bootm.c before attempting to boot an image | 2284 | 1 common/cmd_bootm.c before attempting to boot an image |
2289 | -1 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad magic number | 2285 | -1 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad magic number |
2290 | 2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct magic number | 2286 | 2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct magic number |
2291 | -2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad checksum | 2287 | -2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad checksum |
2292 | 3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct checksum | 2288 | 3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct checksum |
2293 | -3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has bad checksum | 2289 | -3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has bad checksum |
2294 | 4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has correct checksum | 2290 | 4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has correct checksum |
2295 | -4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image is for unsupported architecture | 2291 | -4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image is for unsupported architecture |
2296 | 5 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK | 2292 | 5 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK |
2297 | -5 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi) | 2293 | -5 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi) |
2298 | 6 common/cmd_bootm.c Image Type check OK | 2294 | 6 common/cmd_bootm.c Image Type check OK |
2299 | -6 common/cmd_bootm.c gunzip uncompression error | 2295 | -6 common/cmd_bootm.c gunzip uncompression error |
2300 | -7 common/cmd_bootm.c Unimplemented compression type | 2296 | -7 common/cmd_bootm.c Unimplemented compression type |
2301 | 7 common/cmd_bootm.c Uncompression OK | 2297 | 7 common/cmd_bootm.c Uncompression OK |
2302 | 8 common/cmd_bootm.c No uncompress/copy overwrite error | 2298 | 8 common/cmd_bootm.c No uncompress/copy overwrite error |
2303 | -9 common/cmd_bootm.c Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX) | 2299 | -9 common/cmd_bootm.c Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX) |
2304 | 2300 | ||
2305 | 9 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification | 2301 | 9 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification |
2306 | -10 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad magic number | 2302 | -10 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad magic number |
2307 | -11 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad checksum | 2303 | -11 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad checksum |
2308 | 10 common/image.c Ramdisk header is OK | 2304 | 10 common/image.c Ramdisk header is OK |
2309 | -12 common/image.c Ramdisk data has bad checksum | 2305 | -12 common/image.c Ramdisk data has bad checksum |
2310 | 11 common/image.c Ramdisk data has correct checksum | 2306 | 11 common/image.c Ramdisk data has correct checksum |
2311 | 12 common/image.c Ramdisk verification complete, start loading | 2307 | 12 common/image.c Ramdisk verification complete, start loading |
2312 | -13 common/image.c Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk) | 2308 | -13 common/image.c Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk) |
2313 | 13 common/image.c Start multifile image verification | 2309 | 13 common/image.c Start multifile image verification |
2314 | 14 common/image.c No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue. | 2310 | 14 common/image.c No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue. |
2315 | 2311 | ||
2316 | 15 arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS | 2312 | 15 arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS |
2317 | 2313 | ||
2318 | -30 arch/powerpc/lib/board.c Fatal error, hang the system | 2314 | -30 arch/powerpc/lib/board.c Fatal error, hang the system |
2319 | -31 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog() | 2315 | -31 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog() |
2320 | -32 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_run_single() | 2316 | -32 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_run_single() |
2321 | 2317 | ||
2322 | 34 common/cmd_doc.c before loading a Image from a DOC device | 2318 | 34 common/cmd_doc.c before loading a Image from a DOC device |
2323 | -35 common/cmd_doc.c Bad usage of "doc" command | 2319 | -35 common/cmd_doc.c Bad usage of "doc" command |
2324 | 35 common/cmd_doc.c correct usage of "doc" command | 2320 | 35 common/cmd_doc.c correct usage of "doc" command |
2325 | -36 common/cmd_doc.c No boot device | 2321 | -36 common/cmd_doc.c No boot device |
2326 | 36 common/cmd_doc.c correct boot device | 2322 | 36 common/cmd_doc.c correct boot device |
2327 | -37 common/cmd_doc.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device | 2323 | -37 common/cmd_doc.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device |
2328 | 37 common/cmd_doc.c correct chip ID found, device available | 2324 | 37 common/cmd_doc.c correct chip ID found, device available |
2329 | -38 common/cmd_doc.c Read Error on boot device | 2325 | -38 common/cmd_doc.c Read Error on boot device |
2330 | 38 common/cmd_doc.c reading Image header from DOC device OK | 2326 | 38 common/cmd_doc.c reading Image header from DOC device OK |
2331 | -39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has bad magic number | 2327 | -39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has bad magic number |
2332 | 39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number | 2328 | 39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number |
2333 | -40 common/cmd_doc.c Error reading Image from DOC device | 2329 | -40 common/cmd_doc.c Error reading Image from DOC device |
2334 | 40 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number | 2330 | 40 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number |
2335 | 41 common/cmd_ide.c before loading a Image from a IDE device | 2331 | 41 common/cmd_ide.c before loading a Image from a IDE device |
2336 | -42 common/cmd_ide.c Bad usage of "ide" command | 2332 | -42 common/cmd_ide.c Bad usage of "ide" command |
2337 | 42 common/cmd_ide.c correct usage of "ide" command | 2333 | 42 common/cmd_ide.c correct usage of "ide" command |
2338 | -43 common/cmd_ide.c No boot device | 2334 | -43 common/cmd_ide.c No boot device |
2339 | 43 common/cmd_ide.c boot device found | 2335 | 43 common/cmd_ide.c boot device found |
2340 | -44 common/cmd_ide.c Device not available | 2336 | -44 common/cmd_ide.c Device not available |
2341 | 44 common/cmd_ide.c Device available | 2337 | 44 common/cmd_ide.c Device available |
2342 | -45 common/cmd_ide.c wrong partition selected | 2338 | -45 common/cmd_ide.c wrong partition selected |
2343 | 45 common/cmd_ide.c partition selected | 2339 | 45 common/cmd_ide.c partition selected |
2344 | -46 common/cmd_ide.c Unknown partition table | 2340 | -46 common/cmd_ide.c Unknown partition table |
2345 | 46 common/cmd_ide.c valid partition table found | 2341 | 46 common/cmd_ide.c valid partition table found |
2346 | -47 common/cmd_ide.c Invalid partition type | 2342 | -47 common/cmd_ide.c Invalid partition type |
2347 | 47 common/cmd_ide.c correct partition type | 2343 | 47 common/cmd_ide.c correct partition type |
2348 | -48 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image Header on boot device | 2344 | -48 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image Header on boot device |
2349 | 48 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image Header from IDE device OK | 2345 | 48 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image Header from IDE device OK |
2350 | -49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad magic number | 2346 | -49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad magic number |
2351 | 49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct magic number | 2347 | 49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct magic number |
2352 | -50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad checksum | 2348 | -50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad checksum |
2353 | 50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct checksum | 2349 | 50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct checksum |
2354 | -51 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image from IDE device | 2350 | -51 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image from IDE device |
2355 | 51 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image from IDE device OK | 2351 | 51 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image from IDE device OK |
2356 | 52 common/cmd_nand.c before loading a Image from a NAND device | 2352 | 52 common/cmd_nand.c before loading a Image from a NAND device |
2357 | -53 common/cmd_nand.c Bad usage of "nand" command | 2353 | -53 common/cmd_nand.c Bad usage of "nand" command |
2358 | 53 common/cmd_nand.c correct usage of "nand" command | 2354 | 53 common/cmd_nand.c correct usage of "nand" command |
2359 | -54 common/cmd_nand.c No boot device | 2355 | -54 common/cmd_nand.c No boot device |
2360 | 54 common/cmd_nand.c boot device found | 2356 | 54 common/cmd_nand.c boot device found |
2361 | -55 common/cmd_nand.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device | 2357 | -55 common/cmd_nand.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device |
2362 | 55 common/cmd_nand.c correct chip ID found, device available | 2358 | 55 common/cmd_nand.c correct chip ID found, device available |
2363 | -56 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image Header on boot device | 2359 | -56 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image Header on boot device |
2364 | 56 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image Header from NAND device OK | 2360 | 56 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image Header from NAND device OK |
2365 | -57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has bad magic number | 2361 | -57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has bad magic number |
2366 | 57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has correct magic number | 2362 | 57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has correct magic number |
2367 | -58 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image from NAND device | 2363 | -58 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image from NAND device |
2368 | 58 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image from NAND device OK | 2364 | 58 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image from NAND device OK |
2369 | 2365 | ||
2370 | -60 common/env_common.c Environment has a bad CRC, using default | 2366 | -60 common/env_common.c Environment has a bad CRC, using default |
2371 | 2367 | ||
2372 | 64 net/eth.c starting with Ethernet configuration. | 2368 | 64 net/eth.c starting with Ethernet configuration. |
2373 | -64 net/eth.c no Ethernet found. | 2369 | -64 net/eth.c no Ethernet found. |
2374 | 65 net/eth.c Ethernet found. | 2370 | 65 net/eth.c Ethernet found. |
2375 | 2371 | ||
2376 | -80 common/cmd_net.c usage wrong | 2372 | -80 common/cmd_net.c usage wrong |
2377 | 80 common/cmd_net.c before calling net_loop() | 2373 | 80 common/cmd_net.c before calling net_loop() |
2378 | -81 common/cmd_net.c some error in net_loop() occurred | 2374 | -81 common/cmd_net.c some error in net_loop() occurred |
2379 | 81 common/cmd_net.c net_loop() back without error | 2375 | 81 common/cmd_net.c net_loop() back without error |
2380 | -82 common/cmd_net.c size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded) | 2376 | -82 common/cmd_net.c size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded) |
2381 | 82 common/cmd_net.c trying automatic boot | 2377 | 82 common/cmd_net.c trying automatic boot |
2382 | 83 common/cmd_net.c running "source" command | 2378 | 83 common/cmd_net.c running "source" command |
2383 | -83 common/cmd_net.c some error in automatic boot or "source" command | 2379 | -83 common/cmd_net.c some error in automatic boot or "source" command |
2384 | 84 common/cmd_net.c end without errors | 2380 | 84 common/cmd_net.c end without errors |
2385 | 2381 | ||
2386 | FIT uImage format: | 2382 | FIT uImage format: |
2387 | 2383 | ||
2388 | Arg Where When | 2384 | Arg Where When |
2389 | 100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has correct format | 2385 | 100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has correct format |
2390 | -100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format | 2386 | -100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format |
2391 | 101 common/cmd_bootm.c No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration | 2387 | 101 common/cmd_bootm.c No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration |
2392 | -101 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get configuration for kernel subimage | 2388 | -101 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get configuration for kernel subimage |
2393 | 102 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel unit name specified | 2389 | 102 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel unit name specified |
2394 | -103 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage node offset | 2390 | -103 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage node offset |
2395 | 103 common/cmd_bootm.c Found configuration node | 2391 | 103 common/cmd_bootm.c Found configuration node |
2396 | 104 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage node offset | 2392 | 104 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage node offset |
2397 | -104 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification failed | 2393 | -104 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification failed |
2398 | 105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification OK | 2394 | 105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification OK |
2399 | -105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture | 2395 | -105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture |
2400 | 106 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK | 2396 | 106 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK |
2401 | -106 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage has wrong type | 2397 | -106 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage has wrong type |
2402 | 107 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage type OK | 2398 | 107 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage type OK |
2403 | -107 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage data/size | 2399 | -107 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage data/size |
2404 | 108 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage data/size | 2400 | 108 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage data/size |
2405 | -108 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT) | 2401 | -108 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT) |
2406 | -109 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage type | 2402 | -109 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage type |
2407 | -110 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage comp | 2403 | -110 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage comp |
2408 | -111 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage os | 2404 | -111 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage os |
2409 | -112 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage load address | 2405 | -112 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage load address |
2410 | -113 common/cmd_bootm.c Image uncompress/copy overwrite error | 2406 | -113 common/cmd_bootm.c Image uncompress/copy overwrite error |
2411 | 2407 | ||
2412 | 120 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification | 2408 | 120 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification |
2413 | -120 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format | 2409 | -120 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format |
2414 | 121 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has correct format | 2410 | 121 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has correct format |
2415 | 122 common/image.c No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration | 2411 | 122 common/image.c No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration |
2416 | -122 common/image.c Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage | 2412 | -122 common/image.c Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage |
2417 | 123 common/image.c Ramdisk unit name specified | 2413 | 123 common/image.c Ramdisk unit name specified |
2418 | -124 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset | 2414 | -124 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset |
2419 | 125 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage node offset | 2415 | 125 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage node offset |
2420 | -125 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed | 2416 | -125 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed |
2421 | 126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK | 2417 | 126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK |
2422 | -126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture | 2418 | -126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture |
2423 | 127 common/image.c Architecture check OK | 2419 | 127 common/image.c Architecture check OK |
2424 | -127 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size | 2420 | -127 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size |
2425 | 128 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage data/size | 2421 | 128 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage data/size |
2426 | 129 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk load address | 2422 | 129 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk load address |
2427 | -129 common/image.c Got ramdisk load address | 2423 | -129 common/image.c Got ramdisk load address |
2428 | 2424 | ||
2429 | -130 common/cmd_doc.c Incorrect FIT image format | 2425 | -130 common/cmd_doc.c Incorrect FIT image format |
2430 | 131 common/cmd_doc.c FIT image format OK | 2426 | 131 common/cmd_doc.c FIT image format OK |
2431 | 2427 | ||
2432 | -140 common/cmd_ide.c Incorrect FIT image format | 2428 | -140 common/cmd_ide.c Incorrect FIT image format |
2433 | 141 common/cmd_ide.c FIT image format OK | 2429 | 141 common/cmd_ide.c FIT image format OK |
2434 | 2430 | ||
2435 | -150 common/cmd_nand.c Incorrect FIT image format | 2431 | -150 common/cmd_nand.c Incorrect FIT image format |
2436 | 151 common/cmd_nand.c FIT image format OK | 2432 | 151 common/cmd_nand.c FIT image format OK |
2437 | 2433 | ||
2438 | - legacy image format: | 2434 | - legacy image format: |
2439 | CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY | 2435 | CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY |
2440 | enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot. | 2436 | enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot. |
2441 | 2437 | ||
2442 | Default: | 2438 | Default: |
2443 | enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined. | 2439 | enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined. |
2444 | 2440 | ||
2445 | CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY | 2441 | CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY |
2446 | disable the legacy image format | 2442 | disable the legacy image format |
2447 | 2443 | ||
2448 | This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is | 2444 | This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is |
2449 | enabled per default for backward compatibility. | 2445 | enabled per default for backward compatibility. |
2450 | 2446 | ||
2451 | - Standalone program support: | 2447 | - Standalone program support: |
2452 | CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR | 2448 | CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR |
2453 | 2449 | ||
2454 | This option defines a board specific value for the | 2450 | This option defines a board specific value for the |
2455 | address where standalone program gets loaded, thus | 2451 | address where standalone program gets loaded, thus |
2456 | overwriting the architecture dependent default | 2452 | overwriting the architecture dependent default |
2457 | settings. | 2453 | settings. |
2458 | 2454 | ||
2459 | - Frame Buffer Address: | 2455 | - Frame Buffer Address: |
2460 | CONFIG_FB_ADDR | 2456 | CONFIG_FB_ADDR |
2461 | 2457 | ||
2462 | Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific | 2458 | Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific |
2463 | address for frame buffer. This is typically the case | 2459 | address for frame buffer. This is typically the case |
2464 | when using a graphics controller has separate video | 2460 | when using a graphics controller has separate video |
2465 | memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at | 2461 | memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at |
2466 | the given address instead of dynamically reserving it | 2462 | the given address instead of dynamically reserving it |
2467 | in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs | 2463 | in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs |
2468 | the memory for the frame buffer depending on the | 2464 | the memory for the frame buffer depending on the |
2469 | configured panel size. | 2465 | configured panel size. |
2470 | 2466 | ||
2471 | Please see board_init_f function. | 2467 | Please see board_init_f function. |
2472 | 2468 | ||
2473 | - Automatic software updates via TFTP server | 2469 | - Automatic software updates via TFTP server |
2474 | CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP | 2470 | CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP |
2475 | CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX | 2471 | CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX |
2476 | CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX | 2472 | CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX |
2477 | 2473 | ||
2478 | These options enable and control the auto-update feature; | 2474 | These options enable and control the auto-update feature; |
2479 | for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update. | 2475 | for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update. |
2480 | 2476 | ||
2481 | - MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support) | 2477 | - MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support) |
2482 | CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE | 2478 | CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE |
2483 | 2479 | ||
2484 | Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel. | 2480 | Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel. |
2485 | Needed for mtdparts command support. | 2481 | Needed for mtdparts command support. |
2486 | 2482 | ||
2487 | CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS | 2483 | CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS |
2488 | 2484 | ||
2489 | Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux | 2485 | Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux |
2490 | kernel. Needed for UBI support. | 2486 | kernel. Needed for UBI support. |
2491 | 2487 | ||
2492 | - UBI support | 2488 | - UBI support |
2493 | CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG | 2489 | CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG |
2494 | 2490 | ||
2495 | Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing. This leaves | 2491 | Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing. This leaves |
2496 | warnings and errors enabled. | 2492 | warnings and errors enabled. |
2497 | 2493 | ||
2498 | 2494 | ||
2499 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD | 2495 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD |
2500 | This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest | 2496 | This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest |
2501 | erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks | 2497 | erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks |
2502 | of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing | 2498 | of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing |
2503 | wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase | 2499 | wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase |
2504 | counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter. | 2500 | counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter. |
2505 | 2501 | ||
2506 | The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and | 2502 | The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and |
2507 | other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more. | 2503 | other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more. |
2508 | However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock | 2504 | However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock |
2509 | life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g., | 2505 | life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g., |
2510 | to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2). | 2506 | to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2). |
2511 | 2507 | ||
2512 | default: 4096 | 2508 | default: 4096 |
2513 | 2509 | ||
2514 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT | 2510 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT |
2515 | This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI | 2511 | This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI |
2516 | expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the | 2512 | expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the |
2517 | underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR | 2513 | underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR |
2518 | flash), this value is ignored. | 2514 | flash), this value is ignored. |
2519 | 2515 | ||
2520 | NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM | 2516 | NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM |
2521 | (Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime. | 2517 | (Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime. |
2522 | The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks | 2518 | The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks |
2523 | then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)", | 2519 | then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)", |
2524 | which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total | 2520 | which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total |
2525 | count of eraseblocks on the chip). | 2521 | count of eraseblocks on the chip). |
2526 | 2522 | ||
2527 | To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to | 2523 | To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to |
2528 | reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks | 2524 | reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks |
2529 | handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire | 2525 | handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire |
2530 | NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means | 2526 | NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means |
2531 | that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad | 2527 | that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad |
2532 | eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same | 2528 | eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same |
2533 | size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a | 2529 | size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a |
2534 | partition. | 2530 | partition. |
2535 | 2531 | ||
2536 | default: 20 | 2532 | default: 20 |
2537 | 2533 | ||
2538 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP | 2534 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP |
2539 | Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device | 2535 | Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device |
2540 | in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it | 2536 | in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it |
2541 | only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device. | 2537 | only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device. |
2542 | The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach | 2538 | The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach |
2543 | the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where | 2539 | the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where |
2544 | attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install | 2540 | attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install |
2545 | a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter | 2541 | a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter |
2546 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note | 2542 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note |
2547 | that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations | 2543 | that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations |
2548 | without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap | 2544 | without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap |
2549 | fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps. | 2545 | fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps. |
2550 | 2546 | ||
2551 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT | 2547 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT |
2552 | Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images | 2548 | Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images |
2553 | without a fastmap. | 2549 | without a fastmap. |
2554 | default: 0 | 2550 | default: 0 |
2555 | 2551 | ||
2556 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG | 2552 | CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG |
2557 | Enable UBI fastmap debug | 2553 | Enable UBI fastmap debug |
2558 | default: 0 | 2554 | default: 0 |
2559 | 2555 | ||
2560 | - UBIFS support | 2556 | - UBIFS support |
2561 | CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG | 2557 | CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG |
2562 | 2558 | ||
2563 | Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing. This leaves | 2559 | Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing. This leaves |
2564 | warnings and errors enabled. | 2560 | warnings and errors enabled. |
2565 | 2561 | ||
2566 | - SPL framework | 2562 | - SPL framework |
2567 | CONFIG_SPL | 2563 | CONFIG_SPL |
2568 | Enable building of SPL globally. | 2564 | Enable building of SPL globally. |
2569 | 2565 | ||
2570 | CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT | 2566 | CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT |
2571 | LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary. | 2567 | LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary. |
2572 | 2568 | ||
2573 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT | 2569 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT |
2574 | Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included. | 2570 | Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included. |
2575 | When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory | 2571 | When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory |
2576 | used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it. | 2572 | used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it. |
2577 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE | 2573 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE |
2578 | must not be both defined at the same time. | 2574 | must not be both defined at the same time. |
2579 | 2575 | ||
2580 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE | 2576 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE |
2581 | Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and | 2577 | Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and |
2582 | linker lists sections), BSS excluded. | 2578 | linker lists sections), BSS excluded. |
2583 | When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does | 2579 | When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does |
2584 | not exceed it. | 2580 | not exceed it. |
2585 | 2581 | ||
2586 | CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE | 2582 | CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE |
2587 | TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary. | 2583 | TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary. |
2588 | 2584 | ||
2589 | CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE | 2585 | CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE |
2590 | Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to | 2586 | Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to |
2591 | CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done). | 2587 | CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done). |
2592 | 2588 | ||
2593 | CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR | 2589 | CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR |
2594 | Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary. | 2590 | Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary. |
2595 | 2591 | ||
2596 | CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE | 2592 | CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE |
2597 | Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS. | 2593 | Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS. |
2598 | When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used | 2594 | When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used |
2599 | by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it. | 2595 | by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it. |
2600 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE | 2596 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE |
2601 | must not be both defined at the same time. | 2597 | must not be both defined at the same time. |
2602 | 2598 | ||
2603 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK | 2599 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK |
2604 | Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use | 2600 | Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use |
2605 | 2601 | ||
2606 | CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE | 2602 | CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE |
2607 | When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has | 2603 | When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has |
2608 | loaded does not have a signature. | 2604 | loaded does not have a signature. |
2609 | Defining this is useful when code which loads images | 2605 | Defining this is useful when code which loads images |
2610 | in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors | 2606 | in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors |
2611 | will be caught. | 2607 | will be caught. |
2612 | An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will | 2608 | An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will |
2613 | consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad, | 2609 | consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad, |
2614 | and thus should be skipped silently. | 2610 | and thus should be skipped silently. |
2615 | 2611 | ||
2616 | CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK | 2612 | CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK |
2617 | Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after | 2613 | Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after |
2618 | relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to | 2614 | relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to |
2619 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK. | 2615 | CONFIG_SPL_STACK. |
2620 | 2616 | ||
2621 | CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START | 2617 | CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START |
2622 | Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL. | 2618 | Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL. |
2623 | When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and | 2619 | When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and |
2624 | it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc() | 2620 | it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc() |
2625 | can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined. | 2621 | can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined. |
2626 | 2622 | ||
2627 | CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE | 2623 | CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE |
2628 | The size of the malloc pool used in SPL. | 2624 | The size of the malloc pool used in SPL. |
2629 | 2625 | ||
2630 | CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT | 2626 | CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT |
2631 | Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL. | 2627 | Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL. |
2632 | See also: doc/README.falcon | 2628 | See also: doc/README.falcon |
2633 | 2629 | ||
2634 | CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT | 2630 | CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT |
2635 | For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information | 2631 | For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information |
2636 | about the running system. | 2632 | about the running system. |
2637 | 2633 | ||
2638 | CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL | 2634 | CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL |
2639 | Arch init code should be built for a very small image | 2635 | Arch init code should be built for a very small image |
2640 | 2636 | ||
2641 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION | 2637 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION |
2642 | Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being | 2638 | Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being |
2643 | used in raw mode | 2639 | used in raw mode |
2644 | 2640 | ||
2645 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR | 2641 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR |
2646 | Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being | 2642 | Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being |
2647 | used in raw mode (for Falcon mode) | 2643 | used in raw mode (for Falcon mode) |
2648 | 2644 | ||
2649 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR, | 2645 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR, |
2650 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS | 2646 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS |
2651 | Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument | 2647 | Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument |
2652 | parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode | 2648 | parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode |
2653 | (for falcon mode) | 2649 | (for falcon mode) |
2654 | 2650 | ||
2655 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_FS_BOOT_PARTITION | 2651 | CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_FS_BOOT_PARTITION |
2656 | Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being | 2652 | Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being |
2657 | used in fs mode | 2653 | used in fs mode |
2658 | 2654 | ||
2659 | CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME | 2655 | CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME |
2660 | Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem | 2656 | Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem |
2661 | 2657 | ||
2662 | CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME | 2658 | CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME |
2663 | Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading | 2659 | Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading |
2664 | from filesystem (for Falcon mode) | 2660 | from filesystem (for Falcon mode) |
2665 | 2661 | ||
2666 | CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME | 2662 | CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME |
2667 | Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters | 2663 | Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters |
2668 | when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode) | 2664 | when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode) |
2669 | 2665 | ||
2670 | CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND | 2666 | CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND |
2671 | Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that | 2667 | Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that |
2672 | start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before | 2668 | start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before |
2673 | continuing (the hardware starts execution after just | 2669 | continuing (the hardware starts execution after just |
2674 | loading the first page rather than the full 4K). | 2670 | loading the first page rather than the full 4K). |
2675 | 2671 | ||
2676 | CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE | 2672 | CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE |
2677 | Avoid SPL relocation | 2673 | Avoid SPL relocation |
2678 | 2674 | ||
2679 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE | 2675 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE |
2680 | Include nand_base.c in the SPL. Requires | 2676 | Include nand_base.c in the SPL. Requires |
2681 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS. | 2677 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS. |
2682 | 2678 | ||
2683 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS | 2679 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS |
2684 | SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers. | 2680 | SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers. |
2685 | 2681 | ||
2686 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC | 2682 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC |
2687 | Include standard software ECC in the SPL | 2683 | Include standard software ECC in the SPL |
2688 | 2684 | ||
2689 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE | 2685 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE |
2690 | Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that | 2686 | Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that |
2691 | expose the cmd_ctrl() interface. | 2687 | expose the cmd_ctrl() interface. |
2692 | 2688 | ||
2693 | CONFIG_SPL_UBI | 2689 | CONFIG_SPL_UBI |
2694 | Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and | 2690 | Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and |
2695 | loader | 2691 | loader |
2696 | 2692 | ||
2697 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY | 2693 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY |
2698 | Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only | 2694 | Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only |
2699 | if you need to save space. | 2695 | if you need to save space. |
2700 | 2696 | ||
2701 | CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR | 2697 | CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR |
2702 | Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in | 2698 | Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in |
2703 | SPL binary. | 2699 | SPL binary. |
2704 | 2700 | ||
2705 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT, | 2701 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT, |
2706 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE, | 2702 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE, |
2707 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS, | 2703 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS, |
2708 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE, | 2704 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE, |
2709 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES | 2705 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES |
2710 | Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses | 2706 | Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses |
2711 | to read U-Boot | 2707 | to read U-Boot |
2712 | 2708 | ||
2713 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT | 2709 | CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT |
2714 | Add support NAND boot | 2710 | Add support NAND boot |
2715 | 2711 | ||
2716 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS | 2712 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS |
2717 | Location in NAND to read U-Boot from | 2713 | Location in NAND to read U-Boot from |
2718 | 2714 | ||
2719 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST | 2715 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST |
2720 | Location in memory to load U-Boot to | 2716 | Location in memory to load U-Boot to |
2721 | 2717 | ||
2722 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE | 2718 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE |
2723 | Size of image to load | 2719 | Size of image to load |
2724 | 2720 | ||
2725 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START | 2721 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START |
2726 | Entry point in loaded image to jump to | 2722 | Entry point in loaded image to jump to |
2727 | 2723 | ||
2728 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST | 2724 | CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST |
2729 | Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the | 2725 | Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the |
2730 | data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms. | 2726 | data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms. |
2731 | 2727 | ||
2732 | CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE | 2728 | CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE |
2733 | Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary | 2729 | Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary |
2734 | 2730 | ||
2735 | CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO | 2731 | CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO |
2736 | Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending | 2732 | Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending |
2737 | the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as | 2733 | the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as |
2738 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. | 2734 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. |
2739 | CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL | 2735 | CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL |
2740 | payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. | 2736 | payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. |
2741 | 2737 | ||
2742 | CONFIG_SPL_TARGET | 2738 | CONFIG_SPL_TARGET |
2743 | Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs | 2739 | Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs |
2744 | use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for | 2740 | use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for |
2745 | example if more than one image needs to be produced. | 2741 | example if more than one image needs to be produced. |
2746 | 2742 | ||
2747 | CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT | 2743 | CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT |
2748 | Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of | 2744 | Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of |
2749 | code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this | 2745 | code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this |
2750 | option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the | 2746 | option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the |
2751 | bootm command when booting a FIT image. | 2747 | bootm command when booting a FIT image. |
2752 | 2748 | ||
2753 | - TPL framework | 2749 | - TPL framework |
2754 | CONFIG_TPL | 2750 | CONFIG_TPL |
2755 | Enable building of TPL globally. | 2751 | Enable building of TPL globally. |
2756 | 2752 | ||
2757 | CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO | 2753 | CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO |
2758 | Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending | 2754 | Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending |
2759 | the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as | 2755 | the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as |
2760 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. | 2756 | CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. |
2761 | CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL | 2757 | CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL |
2762 | payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. | 2758 | payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. |
2763 | 2759 | ||
2764 | - Interrupt support (PPC): | 2760 | - Interrupt support (PPC): |
2765 | 2761 | ||
2766 | There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt() | 2762 | There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt() |
2767 | for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu() | 2763 | for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu() |
2768 | for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu() | 2764 | for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu() |
2769 | should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If | 2765 | should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If |
2770 | CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt | 2766 | CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt |
2771 | (ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero. | 2767 | (ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero. |
2772 | timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU | 2768 | timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU |
2773 | specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led | 2769 | specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led |
2774 | / other_activity_monitor it works automatically from | 2770 | / other_activity_monitor it works automatically from |
2775 | general timer_interrupt(). | 2771 | general timer_interrupt(). |
2776 | 2772 | ||
2777 | 2773 | ||
2778 | Board initialization settings: | 2774 | Board initialization settings: |
2779 | ------------------------------ | 2775 | ------------------------------ |
2780 | 2776 | ||
2781 | During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions | 2777 | During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions |
2782 | to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup | 2778 | to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup |
2783 | before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the | 2779 | before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the |
2784 | following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is | 2780 | following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is |
2785 | architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c | 2781 | architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c |
2786 | typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r(). | 2782 | typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r(). |
2787 | 2783 | ||
2788 | - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f() | 2784 | - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f() |
2789 | - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r() | 2785 | - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r() |
2790 | - CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init() | 2786 | - CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init() |
2791 | - CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init() | 2787 | - CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init() |
2792 | 2788 | ||
2793 | Configuration Settings: | 2789 | Configuration Settings: |
2794 | ----------------------- | 2790 | ----------------------- |
2795 | 2791 | ||
2796 | - CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit. | 2792 | - CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit. |
2797 | Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands. | 2793 | Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands. |
2798 | 2794 | ||
2799 | - CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included; | 2795 | - CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included; |
2800 | undefine this when you're short of memory. | 2796 | undefine this when you're short of memory. |
2801 | 2797 | ||
2802 | - CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default | 2798 | - CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default |
2803 | width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output. | 2799 | width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output. |
2804 | 2800 | ||
2805 | - CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to | 2801 | - CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to |
2806 | prompt for user input. | 2802 | prompt for user input. |
2807 | 2803 | ||
2808 | - CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console | 2804 | - CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console |
2809 | 2805 | ||
2810 | - CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output | 2806 | - CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output |
2811 | 2807 | ||
2812 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands | 2808 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands |
2813 | 2809 | ||
2814 | - CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to | 2810 | - CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to |
2815 | the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is | 2811 | the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is |
2816 | booted | 2812 | booted |
2817 | 2813 | ||
2818 | - CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE: | 2814 | - CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE: |
2819 | List of legal baudrate settings for this board. | 2815 | List of legal baudrate settings for this board. |
2820 | 2816 | ||
2821 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END: | 2817 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END: |
2822 | Begin and End addresses of the area used by the | 2818 | Begin and End addresses of the area used by the |
2823 | simple memory test. | 2819 | simple memory test. |
2824 | 2820 | ||
2825 | - CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST: | 2821 | - CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST: |
2826 | Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test. | 2822 | Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test. |
2827 | 2823 | ||
2828 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH: | 2824 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH: |
2829 | Scratch address used by the alternate memory test | 2825 | Scratch address used by the alternate memory test |
2830 | You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable | 2826 | You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable |
2831 | 2827 | ||
2832 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE | 2828 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE |
2833 | Only implemented for ARMv8 for now. | 2829 | Only implemented for ARMv8 for now. |
2834 | If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory | 2830 | If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory |
2835 | is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS. | 2831 | is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS. |
2836 | This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable | 2832 | This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable |
2837 | gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems | 2833 | gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems |
2838 | the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks, | 2834 | the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks, |
2839 | this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address. | 2835 | this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address. |
2840 | 2836 | ||
2841 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE: | 2837 | - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE: |
2842 | If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, | 2838 | If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, |
2843 | this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top | 2839 | this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top |
2844 | (end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By | 2840 | (end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By |
2845 | fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed | 2841 | fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed |
2846 | the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either. | 2842 | the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either. |
2847 | This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux | 2843 | This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux |
2848 | board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that | 2844 | board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that |
2849 | recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup | 2845 | recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup |
2850 | will have to get fixed in Linux additionally. | 2846 | will have to get fixed in Linux additionally. |
2851 | 2847 | ||
2852 | This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx | 2848 | This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx |
2853 | CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't | 2849 | CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't |
2854 | be touched. | 2850 | be touched. |
2855 | 2851 | ||
2856 | WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of | 2852 | WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of |
2857 | the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case, | 2853 | the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case, |
2858 | then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a | 2854 | then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a |
2859 | non page size aligned address and this could cause major | 2855 | non page size aligned address and this could cause major |
2860 | problems. | 2856 | problems. |
2861 | 2857 | ||
2862 | - CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE: | 2858 | - CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE: |
2863 | Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download | 2859 | Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download |
2864 | 2860 | ||
2865 | - CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE: | 2861 | - CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE: |
2866 | Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here. | 2862 | Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here. |
2867 | 2863 | ||
2868 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE: | 2864 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE: |
2869 | Physical start address of Flash memory. | 2865 | Physical start address of Flash memory. |
2870 | 2866 | ||
2871 | - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE: | 2867 | - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE: |
2872 | Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by | 2868 | Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by |
2873 | make config files to be same as the text base address | 2869 | make config files to be same as the text base address |
2874 | (CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as | 2870 | (CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as |
2875 | CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash. | 2871 | CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash. |
2876 | 2872 | ||
2877 | - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN: | 2873 | - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN: |
2878 | Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to | 2874 | Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to |
2879 | determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is | 2875 | determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is |
2880 | embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate | 2876 | embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate |
2881 | flash sector. | 2877 | flash sector. |
2882 | 2878 | ||
2883 | - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN: | 2879 | - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN: |
2884 | Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use. | 2880 | Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use. |
2885 | 2881 | ||
2886 | - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN | 2882 | - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN |
2887 | Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If | 2883 | Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If |
2888 | this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation | 2884 | this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation |
2889 | will become available before relocation. The address is just | 2885 | will become available before relocation. The address is just |
2890 | below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make | 2886 | below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make |
2891 | space. | 2887 | space. |
2892 | 2888 | ||
2893 | This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses | 2889 | This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses |
2894 | within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc() | 2890 | within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc() |
2895 | is not available. free() is supported but does nothing. | 2891 | is not available. free() is supported but does nothing. |
2896 | The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when | 2892 | The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when |
2897 | U-Boot relocates itself. | 2893 | U-Boot relocates itself. |
2898 | 2894 | ||
2899 | - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE | 2895 | - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE |
2900 | Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those | 2896 | Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those |
2901 | boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is | 2897 | boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is |
2902 | enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START). | 2898 | enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START). |
2903 | 2899 | ||
2904 | - CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY: | 2900 | - CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY: |
2905 | Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be | 2901 | Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be |
2906 | typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped | 2902 | typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped |
2907 | uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would | 2903 | uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would |
2908 | otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For | 2904 | otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For |
2909 | some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the | 2905 | some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the |
2910 | cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed | 2906 | cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed |
2911 | are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding | 2907 | are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding |
2912 | cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e. | 2908 | cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e. |
2913 | if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the | 2909 | if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the |
2914 | size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of | 2910 | size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of |
2915 | one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has | 2911 | one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has |
2916 | written to another region in the same cache-line. This can | 2912 | written to another region in the same cache-line. This can |
2917 | happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for | 2913 | happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for |
2918 | buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g. | 2914 | buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g. |
2919 | 16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes). | 2915 | 16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes). |
2920 | 2916 | ||
2921 | Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present. | 2917 | Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present. |
2922 | 2918 | ||
2923 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN: | 2919 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN: |
2924 | Normally compressed uImages are limited to an | 2920 | Normally compressed uImages are limited to an |
2925 | uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough, | 2921 | uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough, |
2926 | you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file | 2922 | you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file |
2927 | to adjust this setting to your needs. | 2923 | to adjust this setting to your needs. |
2928 | 2924 | ||
2929 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ: | 2925 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ: |
2930 | Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of | 2926 | Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of |
2931 | the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by | 2927 | the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by |
2932 | the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if | 2928 | the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if |
2933 | used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low" | 2929 | used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low" |
2934 | environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case | 2930 | environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case |
2935 | all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low" | 2931 | all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low" |
2936 | and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment | 2932 | and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment |
2937 | variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of | 2933 | variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of |
2938 | CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined, | 2934 | CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined, |
2939 | then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead. | 2935 | then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead. |
2940 | 2936 | ||
2941 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH: | 2937 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH: |
2942 | Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the | 2938 | Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the |
2943 | initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand | 2939 | initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand |
2944 | is enabled. | 2940 | is enabled. |
2945 | 2941 | ||
2946 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE: | 2942 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE: |
2947 | Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between | 2943 | Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between |
2948 | "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. | 2944 | "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. |
2949 | 2945 | ||
2950 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD: | 2946 | - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD: |
2951 | Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in | 2947 | Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in |
2952 | space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. | 2948 | space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. |
2953 | 2949 | ||
2954 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS: | 2950 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS: |
2955 | Max number of Flash memory banks | 2951 | Max number of Flash memory banks |
2956 | 2952 | ||
2957 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT: | 2953 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT: |
2958 | Max number of sectors on a Flash chip | 2954 | Max number of sectors on a Flash chip |
2959 | 2955 | ||
2960 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT: | 2956 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT: |
2961 | Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms) | 2957 | Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms) |
2962 | 2958 | ||
2963 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT: | 2959 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT: |
2964 | Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms) | 2960 | Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms) |
2965 | 2961 | ||
2966 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT | 2962 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT |
2967 | Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms) | 2963 | Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms) |
2968 | 2964 | ||
2969 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT | 2965 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT |
2970 | Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms) | 2966 | Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms) |
2971 | 2967 | ||
2972 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION | 2968 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION |
2973 | If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used | 2969 | If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used |
2974 | instead of U-Boot software protection. | 2970 | instead of U-Boot software protection. |
2975 | 2971 | ||
2976 | - CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP: | 2972 | - CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP: |
2977 | 2973 | ||
2978 | Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory; | 2974 | Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory; |
2979 | without this option such a download has to be | 2975 | without this option such a download has to be |
2980 | performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2) | 2976 | performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2) |
2981 | copy from RAM to flash. | 2977 | copy from RAM to flash. |
2982 | 2978 | ||
2983 | The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since | 2979 | The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since |
2984 | you can check if the download worked before you erase | 2980 | you can check if the download worked before you erase |
2985 | the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is | 2981 | the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is |
2986 | too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the | 2982 | too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the |
2987 | downloaded image) this option may be very useful. | 2983 | downloaded image) this option may be very useful. |
2988 | 2984 | ||
2989 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI: | 2985 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI: |
2990 | Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the | 2986 | Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the |
2991 | common flash structure for storing flash geometry. | 2987 | common flash structure for storing flash geometry. |
2992 | 2988 | ||
2993 | - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER | 2989 | - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER |
2994 | This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver | 2990 | This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver |
2995 | in the drivers directory | 2991 | in the drivers directory |
2996 | 2992 | ||
2997 | - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD | 2993 | - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD |
2998 | This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver | 2994 | This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver |
2999 | in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash | 2995 | in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash |
3000 | to the MTD layer. | 2996 | to the MTD layer. |
3001 | 2997 | ||
3002 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE | 2998 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE |
3003 | Use buffered writes to flash. | 2999 | Use buffered writes to flash. |
3004 | 3000 | ||
3005 | - CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N | 3001 | - CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N |
3006 | s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered | 3002 | s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered |
3007 | write commands. | 3003 | write commands. |
3008 | 3004 | ||
3009 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST | 3005 | - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST |
3010 | If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't | 3006 | If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't |
3011 | print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This | 3007 | print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This |
3012 | is useful, if some of the configured banks are only | 3008 | is useful, if some of the configured banks are only |
3013 | optionally available. | 3009 | optionally available. |
3014 | 3010 | ||
3015 | - CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS | 3011 | - CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS |
3016 | If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown | 3012 | If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown |
3017 | digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80 | 3013 | digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80 |
3018 | column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays. | 3014 | column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays. |
3019 | 3015 | ||
3020 | - CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY | 3016 | - CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY |
3021 | If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared | 3017 | If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared |
3022 | against the source after the write operation. An error message | 3018 | against the source after the write operation. An error message |
3023 | will be printed when the contents are not identical. | 3019 | will be printed when the contents are not identical. |
3024 | Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases, | 3020 | Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases, |
3025 | since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier | 3021 | since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier |
3026 | while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable | 3022 | while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable |
3027 | this option if you really know what you are doing. | 3023 | this option if you really know what you are doing. |
3028 | 3024 | ||
3029 | - CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER: | 3025 | - CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER: |
3030 | Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some | 3026 | Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some |
3031 | Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value | 3027 | Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value |
3032 | to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all | 3028 | to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all |
3033 | buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface | 3029 | buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface |
3034 | on high Ethernet traffic. | 3030 | on high Ethernet traffic. |
3035 | Defaults to 4 if not defined. | 3031 | Defaults to 4 if not defined. |
3036 | 3032 | ||
3037 | - CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES | 3033 | - CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES |
3038 | 3034 | ||
3039 | Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used | 3035 | Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used |
3040 | internally to store the environment settings. The default | 3036 | internally to store the environment settings. The default |
3041 | setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most | 3037 | setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most |
3042 | cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see | 3038 | cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see |
3043 | lib/hashtable.c for details. | 3039 | lib/hashtable.c for details. |
3044 | 3040 | ||
3045 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT | 3041 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT |
3046 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC | 3042 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC |
3047 | Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when | 3043 | Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when |
3048 | calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal, | 3044 | calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal, |
3049 | hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined, | 3045 | hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined, |
3050 | the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address. | 3046 | the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address. |
3051 | 3047 | ||
3052 | The format of the list is: | 3048 | The format of the list is: |
3053 | type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m] | 3049 | type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m] |
3054 | access_attribute = [a|r|o|c] | 3050 | access_attribute = [a|r|o|c] |
3055 | attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute] | 3051 | attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute] |
3056 | entry = variable_name[:attributes] | 3052 | entry = variable_name[:attributes] |
3057 | list = entry[,list] | 3053 | list = entry[,list] |
3058 | 3054 | ||
3059 | The type attributes are: | 3055 | The type attributes are: |
3060 | s - String (default) | 3056 | s - String (default) |
3061 | d - Decimal | 3057 | d - Decimal |
3062 | x - Hexadecimal | 3058 | x - Hexadecimal |
3063 | b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF]) | 3059 | b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF]) |
3064 | i - IP address | 3060 | i - IP address |
3065 | m - MAC address | 3061 | m - MAC address |
3066 | 3062 | ||
3067 | The access attributes are: | 3063 | The access attributes are: |
3068 | a - Any (default) | 3064 | a - Any (default) |
3069 | r - Read-only | 3065 | r - Read-only |
3070 | o - Write-once | 3066 | o - Write-once |
3071 | c - Change-default | 3067 | c - Change-default |
3072 | 3068 | ||
3073 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT | 3069 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT |
3074 | Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags" | 3070 | Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags" |
3075 | environment variable in the default or embedded environment. | 3071 | environment variable in the default or embedded environment. |
3076 | 3072 | ||
3077 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC | 3073 | - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC |
3078 | Define this to a list (string) to define validation that | 3074 | Define this to a list (string) to define validation that |
3079 | should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags" | 3075 | should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags" |
3080 | environment variable. To override a setting in the static | 3076 | environment variable. To override a setting in the static |
3081 | list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the | 3077 | list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the |
3082 | ".flags" variable. | 3078 | ".flags" variable. |
3083 | 3079 | ||
3084 | If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a | 3080 | If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a |
3085 | regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same | 3081 | regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same |
3086 | flags without explicitly listing them for each variable. | 3082 | flags without explicitly listing them for each variable. |
3087 | 3083 | ||
3088 | - CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE | 3084 | - CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE |
3089 | If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable | 3085 | If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable |
3090 | access flags. | 3086 | access flags. |
3091 | 3087 | ||
3092 | - CONFIG_USE_STDINT | 3088 | - CONFIG_USE_STDINT |
3093 | If stdint.h is available with your toolchain you can define this | 3089 | If stdint.h is available with your toolchain you can define this |
3094 | option to enable it. You can provide option 'USE_STDINT=1' when | 3090 | option to enable it. You can provide option 'USE_STDINT=1' when |
3095 | building U-Boot to enable this. | 3091 | building U-Boot to enable this. |
3096 | 3092 | ||
3097 | The following definitions that deal with the placement and management | 3093 | The following definitions that deal with the placement and management |
3098 | of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the | 3094 | of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the |
3099 | following configurations: | 3095 | following configurations: |
3100 | 3096 | ||
3101 | - CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC: | 3097 | - CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC: |
3102 | 3098 | ||
3103 | Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils | 3099 | Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils |
3104 | may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images. | 3100 | may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images. |
3105 | 3101 | ||
3106 | BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early | 3102 | BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early |
3107 | in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the | 3103 | in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the |
3108 | console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or | 3104 | console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or |
3109 | U-Boot will hang. | 3105 | U-Boot will hang. |
3110 | 3106 | ||
3111 | Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the | 3107 | Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the |
3112 | environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to | 3108 | environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to |
3113 | keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv" | 3109 | keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv" |
3114 | to save the current settings. | 3110 | to save the current settings. |
3115 | 3111 | ||
3116 | BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use | 3112 | BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use |
3117 | "saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the | 3113 | "saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the |
3118 | environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link, | 3114 | environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link, |
3119 | but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface. | 3115 | but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface. |
3120 | 3116 | ||
3121 | - CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST | 3117 | - CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST |
3122 | 3118 | ||
3123 | Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the | 3119 | Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the |
3124 | environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to | 3120 | environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to |
3125 | CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE. | 3121 | CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE. |
3126 | 3122 | ||
3127 | Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor | 3123 | Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor |
3128 | has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been | 3124 | has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been |
3129 | created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use env_get_f() | 3125 | created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use env_get_f() |
3130 | until then to read environment variables. | 3126 | until then to read environment variables. |
3131 | 3127 | ||
3132 | The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor | 3128 | The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor |
3133 | is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working | 3129 | is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working |
3134 | with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is | 3130 | with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is |
3135 | necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the | 3131 | necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the |
3136 | "baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't | 3132 | "baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't |
3137 | have any device yet where we could complain.] | 3133 | have any device yet where we could complain.] |
3138 | 3134 | ||
3139 | Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if | 3135 | Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if |
3140 | the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you | 3136 | the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you |
3141 | use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment. | 3137 | use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment. |
3142 | 3138 | ||
3143 | - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN: | 3139 | - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN: |
3144 | Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED. | 3140 | Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED. |
3145 | 3141 | ||
3146 | Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR | 3142 | Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR |
3147 | also needs to be defined. | 3143 | also needs to be defined. |
3148 | 3144 | ||
3149 | - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR: | 3145 | - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR: |
3150 | MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state. | 3146 | MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state. |
3151 | 3147 | ||
3152 | - CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS: | 3148 | - CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS: |
3153 | Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init | 3149 | Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init |
3154 | and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at | 3150 | and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at |
3155 | drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving | 3151 | drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving |
3156 | space for already greatly restricted images, including but not | 3152 | space for already greatly restricted images, including but not |
3157 | limited to NAND_SPL configurations. | 3153 | limited to NAND_SPL configurations. |
3158 | 3154 | ||
3159 | - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO | 3155 | - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO |
3160 | Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on | 3156 | Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on |
3161 | when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called | 3157 | when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called |
3162 | to do this. | 3158 | to do this. |
3163 | 3159 | ||
3164 | - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE | 3160 | - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE |
3165 | Similar to the previous option, but display this information | 3161 | Similar to the previous option, but display this information |
3166 | later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if | 3162 | later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if |
3167 | present. | 3163 | present. |
3168 | 3164 | ||
3169 | - CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT: | 3165 | - CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT: |
3170 | Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the | 3166 | Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the |
3171 | build system checks that the actual size does not | 3167 | build system checks that the actual size does not |
3172 | exceed it. | 3168 | exceed it. |
3173 | 3169 | ||
3174 | Low Level (hardware related) configuration options: | 3170 | Low Level (hardware related) configuration options: |
3175 | --------------------------------------------------- | 3171 | --------------------------------------------------- |
3176 | 3172 | ||
3177 | - CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE: | 3173 | - CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE: |
3178 | Cache Line Size of the CPU. | 3174 | Cache Line Size of the CPU. |
3179 | 3175 | ||
3180 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT: | 3176 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT: |
3181 | Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale | 3177 | Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale |
3182 | PowerPC SOCs. | 3178 | PowerPC SOCs. |
3183 | 3179 | ||
3184 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR: | 3180 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR: |
3185 | Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically | 3181 | Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically |
3186 | the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. | 3182 | the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. |
3187 | 3183 | ||
3188 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS: | 3184 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS: |
3189 | Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new | 3185 | Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new |
3190 | physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should | 3186 | physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should |
3191 | be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the | 3187 | be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the |
3192 | same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR | 3188 | same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR |
3193 | is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended | 3189 | is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended |
3194 | that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros: | 3190 | that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros: |
3195 | 3191 | ||
3196 | #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH | 3192 | #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH |
3197 | * 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW) | 3193 | * 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW) |
3198 | 3194 | ||
3199 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH: | 3195 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH: |
3200 | Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically | 3196 | Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically |
3201 | either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is | 3197 | either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is |
3202 | used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or | 3198 | used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or |
3203 | integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). | 3199 | integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). |
3204 | 3200 | ||
3205 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW: | 3201 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW: |
3206 | Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is | 3202 | Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is |
3207 | used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or | 3203 | used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or |
3208 | integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). | 3204 | integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). |
3209 | 3205 | ||
3210 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE: | 3206 | - CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE: |
3211 | If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be | 3207 | If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be |
3212 | forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated. | 3208 | forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated. |
3213 | 3209 | ||
3214 | - Floppy Disk Support: | 3210 | - Floppy Disk Support: |
3215 | CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER | 3211 | CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER |
3216 | 3212 | ||
3217 | the default drive number (default value 0) | 3213 | the default drive number (default value 0) |
3218 | 3214 | ||
3219 | CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE | 3215 | CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE |
3220 | 3216 | ||
3221 | defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers | 3217 | defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers |
3222 | (default value 1) | 3218 | (default value 1) |
3223 | 3219 | ||
3224 | CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET | 3220 | CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET |
3225 | 3221 | ||
3226 | defines the offset of register from address. It | 3222 | defines the offset of register from address. It |
3227 | depends on which part of the data bus is connected to | 3223 | depends on which part of the data bus is connected to |
3228 | the FDC chipset. (default value 0) | 3224 | the FDC chipset. (default value 0) |
3229 | 3225 | ||
3230 | If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and | 3226 | If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and |
3231 | CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their | 3227 | CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their |
3232 | default value. | 3228 | default value. |
3233 | 3229 | ||
3234 | if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function | 3230 | if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function |
3235 | fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC | 3231 | fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC |
3236 | setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board | 3232 | setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board |
3237 | source code. It is used to make hardware-dependent | 3233 | source code. It is used to make hardware-dependent |
3238 | initializations. | 3234 | initializations. |
3239 | 3235 | ||
3240 | - CONFIG_IDE_AHB: | 3236 | - CONFIG_IDE_AHB: |
3241 | Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI | 3237 | Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI |
3242 | interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface. | 3238 | interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface. |
3243 | When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to | 3239 | When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to |
3244 | IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional | 3240 | IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional |
3245 | registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller | 3241 | registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller |
3246 | is required. | 3242 | is required. |
3247 | 3243 | ||
3248 | - CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory. | 3244 | - CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory. |
3249 | DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're | 3245 | DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're |
3250 | doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only] | 3246 | doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only] |
3251 | 3247 | ||
3252 | - CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR: | 3248 | - CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR: |
3253 | 3249 | ||
3254 | Start address of memory area that can be used for | 3250 | Start address of memory area that can be used for |
3255 | initial data and stack; please note that this must be | 3251 | initial data and stack; please note that this must be |
3256 | writable memory that is working WITHOUT special | 3252 | writable memory that is working WITHOUT special |
3257 | initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which | 3253 | initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which |
3258 | will become available only after programming the | 3254 | will become available only after programming the |
3259 | memory controller and running certain initialization | 3255 | memory controller and running certain initialization |
3260 | sequences. | 3256 | sequences. |
3261 | 3257 | ||
3262 | U-Boot uses the following memory types: | 3258 | U-Boot uses the following memory types: |
3263 | - MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU) | 3259 | - MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU) |
3264 | 3260 | ||
3265 | - CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET: | 3261 | - CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET: |
3266 | 3262 | ||
3267 | Offset of the initial data structure in the memory | 3263 | Offset of the initial data structure in the memory |
3268 | area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually | 3264 | area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually |
3269 | CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial | 3265 | CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial |
3270 | data is located at the end of the available space | 3266 | data is located at the end of the available space |
3271 | (sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE - | 3267 | (sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE - |
3272 | GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just | 3268 | GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just |
3273 | below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR + | 3269 | below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR + |
3274 | CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward. | 3270 | CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward. |
3275 | 3271 | ||
3276 | Note: | 3272 | Note: |
3277 | On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data | 3273 | On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data |
3278 | cache for initial memory) the address chosen for | 3274 | cache for initial memory) the address chosen for |
3279 | CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must | 3275 | CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must |
3280 | point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between | 3276 | point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between |
3281 | the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space. | 3277 | the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space. |
3282 | 3278 | ||
3283 | - CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27) | 3279 | - CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27) |
3284 | 3280 | ||
3285 | - CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM: | 3281 | - CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM: |
3286 | SDRAM timing | 3282 | SDRAM timing |
3287 | 3283 | ||
3288 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA: | 3284 | - CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA: |
3289 | periodic timer for refresh | 3285 | periodic timer for refresh |
3290 | 3286 | ||
3291 | - FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM, | 3287 | - FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM, |
3292 | CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP, | 3288 | CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP, |
3293 | CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM, | 3289 | CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM, |
3294 | CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM: | 3290 | CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM: |
3295 | Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH) | 3291 | Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH) |
3296 | 3292 | ||
3297 | - SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE, | 3293 | - SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE, |
3298 | CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM, | 3294 | CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM, |
3299 | CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM: | 3295 | CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM: |
3300 | Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM) | 3296 | Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM) |
3301 | 3297 | ||
3302 | - CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY | 3298 | - CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY |
3303 | Only scan through and get the devices on the buses. | 3299 | Only scan through and get the devices on the buses. |
3304 | Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or | 3300 | Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or |
3305 | something has already done it, and we don't need to do it | 3301 | something has already done it, and we don't need to do it |
3306 | a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted | 3302 | a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted |
3307 | by coreboot or similar. | 3303 | by coreboot or similar. |
3308 | 3304 | ||
3309 | - CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE: | 3305 | - CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE: |
3310 | Enable support for indirect PCI bridges. | 3306 | Enable support for indirect PCI bridges. |
3311 | 3307 | ||
3312 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIO: | 3308 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIO: |
3313 | Chip has SRIO or not | 3309 | Chip has SRIO or not |
3314 | 3310 | ||
3315 | - CONFIG_SRIO1: | 3311 | - CONFIG_SRIO1: |
3316 | Board has SRIO 1 port available | 3312 | Board has SRIO 1 port available |
3317 | 3313 | ||
3318 | - CONFIG_SRIO2: | 3314 | - CONFIG_SRIO2: |
3319 | Board has SRIO 2 port available | 3315 | Board has SRIO 2 port available |
3320 | 3316 | ||
3321 | - CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER | 3317 | - CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER |
3322 | Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE | 3318 | Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE |
3323 | 3319 | ||
3324 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT: | 3320 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT: |
3325 | Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region | 3321 | Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region |
3326 | 3322 | ||
3327 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS: | 3323 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS: |
3328 | Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region | 3324 | Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region |
3329 | 3325 | ||
3330 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE: | 3326 | - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE: |
3331 | Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region | 3327 | Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region |
3332 | 3328 | ||
3333 | - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT | 3329 | - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT |
3334 | Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using | 3330 | Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using |
3335 | a 16 bit bus. | 3331 | a 16 bit bus. |
3336 | Not all NAND drivers use this symbol. | 3332 | Not all NAND drivers use this symbol. |
3337 | Example of drivers that use it: | 3333 | Example of drivers that use it: |
3338 | - drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c | 3334 | - drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c |
3339 | - drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c | 3335 | - drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c |
3340 | 3336 | ||
3341 | - CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG | 3337 | - CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG |
3342 | Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined | 3338 | Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined |
3343 | a default value will be used. | 3339 | a default value will be used. |
3344 | 3340 | ||
3345 | - CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM | 3341 | - CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM |
3346 | Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common | 3342 | Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common |
3347 | with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs | 3343 | with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs |
3348 | 3344 | ||
3349 | SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS | 3345 | SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS |
3350 | I2C address of the SPD EEPROM | 3346 | I2C address of the SPD EEPROM |
3351 | 3347 | ||
3352 | - CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM | 3348 | - CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM |
3353 | If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first | 3349 | If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first |
3354 | one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve | 3350 | one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve |
3355 | to something your driver can deal with. | 3351 | to something your driver can deal with. |
3356 | 3352 | ||
3357 | - CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING | 3353 | - CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING |
3358 | Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with | 3354 | Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with |
3359 | soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing | 3355 | soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing |
3360 | parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into | 3356 | parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into |
3361 | header files or board specific files. | 3357 | header files or board specific files. |
3362 | 3358 | ||
3363 | - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE | 3359 | - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE |
3364 | Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr. | 3360 | Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr. |
3365 | 3361 | ||
3366 | - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH | 3362 | - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH |
3367 | Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers. | 3363 | Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers. |
3368 | 3364 | ||
3369 | - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST | 3365 | - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST |
3370 | Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers. | 3366 | Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers. |
3371 | 3367 | ||
3372 | - CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0 | 3368 | - CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0 |
3373 | Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should | 3369 | Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should |
3374 | be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3. | 3370 | be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3. |
3375 | 3371 | ||
3376 | - CONFIG_RMII | 3372 | - CONFIG_RMII |
3377 | Enable RMII mode for all FECs. | 3373 | Enable RMII mode for all FECs. |
3378 | Note that this is a global option, we can't | 3374 | Note that this is a global option, we can't |
3379 | have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode. | 3375 | have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode. |
3380 | 3376 | ||
3381 | - CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY | 3377 | - CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY |
3382 | Add a verify option to the crc32 command. | 3378 | Add a verify option to the crc32 command. |
3383 | The syntax is: | 3379 | The syntax is: |
3384 | 3380 | ||
3385 | => crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32> | 3381 | => crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32> |
3386 | 3382 | ||
3387 | Where address/count indicate a memory area | 3383 | Where address/count indicate a memory area |
3388 | and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the | 3384 | and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the |
3389 | area should have. | 3385 | area should have. |
3390 | 3386 | ||
3391 | - CONFIG_LOOPW | 3387 | - CONFIG_LOOPW |
3392 | Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if | 3388 | Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if |
3393 | the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). | 3389 | the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). |
3394 | 3390 | ||
3395 | - CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC | 3391 | - CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC |
3396 | Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic | 3392 | Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic |
3397 | "md/mw" commands. | 3393 | "md/mw" commands. |
3398 | Examples: | 3394 | Examples: |
3399 | 3395 | ||
3400 | => mdc.b 10 4 500 | 3396 | => mdc.b 10 4 500 |
3401 | This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms. | 3397 | This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms. |
3402 | 3398 | ||
3403 | => mwc.l 100 12345678 10 | 3399 | => mwc.l 100 12345678 10 |
3404 | This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms. | 3400 | This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms. |
3405 | 3401 | ||
3406 | This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated | 3402 | This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated |
3407 | globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). | 3403 | globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). |
3408 | 3404 | ||
3409 | - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT | 3405 | - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT |
3410 | [ARM, NDS32, MIPS, RISC-V only] If this variable is defined, then certain | 3406 | [ARM, NDS32, MIPS, RISC-V only] If this variable is defined, then certain |
3411 | low level initializations (like setting up the memory | 3407 | low level initializations (like setting up the memory |
3412 | controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not | 3408 | controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not |
3413 | relocate itself into RAM. | 3409 | relocate itself into RAM. |
3414 | 3410 | ||
3415 | Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only | 3411 | Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only |
3416 | exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some | 3412 | exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some |
3417 | other boot loader or by a debugger which performs | 3413 | other boot loader or by a debugger which performs |
3418 | these initializations itself. | 3414 | these initializations itself. |
3419 | 3415 | ||
3420 | - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY | 3416 | - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY |
3421 | [ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init() | 3417 | [ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init() |
3422 | to be skipped. The normal CP15 init (such as enabling the | 3418 | to be skipped. The normal CP15 init (such as enabling the |
3423 | instruction cache) is still performed. | 3419 | instruction cache) is still performed. |
3424 | 3420 | ||
3425 | - CONFIG_SPL_BUILD | 3421 | - CONFIG_SPL_BUILD |
3426 | Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader | 3422 | Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader |
3427 | that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when | 3423 | that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when |
3428 | compiling a NAND SPL. | 3424 | compiling a NAND SPL. |
3429 | 3425 | ||
3430 | - CONFIG_TPL_BUILD | 3426 | - CONFIG_TPL_BUILD |
3431 | Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader | 3427 | Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader |
3432 | that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot. | 3428 | that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot. |
3433 | It is loaded by the SPL. | 3429 | It is loaded by the SPL. |
3434 | 3430 | ||
3435 | - CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC | 3431 | - CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC |
3436 | Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section | 3432 | Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section |
3437 | .resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the | 3433 | .resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the |
3438 | previous 4k of the .text section. | 3434 | previous 4k of the .text section. |
3439 | 3435 | ||
3440 | - CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM | 3436 | - CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM |
3441 | Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses | 3437 | Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses |
3442 | effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard | 3438 | effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard |
3443 | U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated | 3439 | U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated |
3444 | to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since | 3440 | to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since |
3445 | it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all | 3441 | it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all |
3446 | addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses | 3442 | addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses |
3447 | to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem(). | 3443 | to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem(). |
3448 | 3444 | ||
3449 | - CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR | 3445 | - CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR |
3450 | If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not | 3446 | If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not |
3451 | needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot. | 3447 | needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot. |
3452 | 3448 | ||
3453 | - CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC: | 3449 | - CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC: |
3454 | Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms | 3450 | Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms |
3455 | 3451 | ||
3456 | - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE | 3452 | - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE |
3457 | Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver | 3453 | Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver |
3458 | driver that uses this: | 3454 | driver that uses this: |
3459 | drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c | 3455 | drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c |
3460 | 3456 | ||
3461 | Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support: | 3457 | Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support: |
3462 | ----------------------------------- | 3458 | ----------------------------------- |
3463 | 3459 | ||
3464 | The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the | 3460 | The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the |
3465 | loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format. | 3461 | loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format. |
3466 | This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros | 3462 | This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros |
3467 | are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address | 3463 | are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address |
3468 | within that device. | 3464 | within that device. |
3469 | 3465 | ||
3470 | - CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR | 3466 | - CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR |
3471 | The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The | 3467 | The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The |
3472 | meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro | 3468 | meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro |
3473 | is also specified. | 3469 | is also specified. |
3474 | 3470 | ||
3475 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR | 3471 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR |
3476 | The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The | 3472 | The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The |
3477 | meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro | 3473 | meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro |
3478 | is also specified. | 3474 | is also specified. |
3479 | 3475 | ||
3480 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH | 3476 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH |
3481 | The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format | 3477 | The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format |
3482 | has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it | 3478 | has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it |
3483 | might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some | 3479 | might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some |
3484 | local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first. | 3480 | local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first. |
3485 | 3481 | ||
3486 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR | 3482 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR |
3487 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as | 3483 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as |
3488 | normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the | 3484 | normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the |
3489 | virtual address in NOR flash. | 3485 | virtual address in NOR flash. |
3490 | 3486 | ||
3491 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND | 3487 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND |
3492 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash. | 3488 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash. |
3493 | CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash. | 3489 | CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash. |
3494 | 3490 | ||
3495 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC | 3491 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC |
3496 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC | 3492 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC |
3497 | device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device. | 3493 | device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device. |
3498 | 3494 | ||
3499 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE | 3495 | - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE |
3500 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master) | 3496 | Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master) |
3501 | memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which | 3497 | memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which |
3502 | can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound | 3498 | can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound |
3503 | window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in | 3499 | window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in |
3504 | master's memory space. | 3500 | master's memory space. |
3505 | 3501 | ||
3506 | Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support: | 3502 | Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support: |
3507 | --------------------------------------------------------- | 3503 | --------------------------------------------------------- |
3508 | The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of | 3504 | The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of |
3509 | "firmware". | 3505 | "firmware". |
3510 | This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros | 3506 | This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros |
3511 | are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address | 3507 | are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address |
3512 | within that device. | 3508 | within that device. |
3513 | 3509 | ||
3514 | - CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET | 3510 | - CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET |
3515 | Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs. | 3511 | Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs. |
3516 | 3512 | ||
3517 | Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support: | 3513 | Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support: |
3518 | ------------------------------------------- | 3514 | ------------------------------------------- |
3519 | The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of | 3515 | The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of |
3520 | "Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom. | 3516 | "Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom. |
3521 | This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting. | 3517 | This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting. |
3522 | 3518 | ||
3523 | - CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN | 3519 | - CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN |
3524 | Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires | 3520 | Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires |
3525 | 3521 | ||
3526 | Reproducible builds | 3522 | Reproducible builds |
3527 | ------------------- | 3523 | ------------------- |
3528 | 3524 | ||
3529 | In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build | 3525 | In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build |
3530 | process have to be set to a fixed value. | 3526 | process have to be set to a fixed value. |
3531 | 3527 | ||
3532 | This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable. | 3528 | This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable. |
3533 | SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration | 3529 | SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration |
3534 | option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot. | 3530 | option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot. |
3535 | 3531 | ||
3536 | SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC. | 3532 | SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC. |
3537 | 3533 | ||
3538 | Building the Software: | 3534 | Building the Software: |
3539 | ====================== | 3535 | ====================== |
3540 | 3536 | ||
3541 | Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments | 3537 | Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments |
3542 | and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support | 3538 | and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support |
3543 | all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all | 3539 | all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all |
3544 | (potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we | 3540 | (potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we |
3545 | recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK) | 3541 | recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK) |
3546 | which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot. | 3542 | which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot. |
3547 | 3543 | ||
3548 | If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you | 3544 | If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you |
3549 | have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case, | 3545 | have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case, |
3550 | you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell. | 3546 | you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell. |
3551 | Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are | 3547 | Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are |
3552 | necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter: | 3548 | necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter: |
3553 | 3549 | ||
3554 | $ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx- | 3550 | $ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx- |
3555 | $ export CROSS_COMPILE | 3551 | $ export CROSS_COMPILE |
3556 | 3552 | ||
3557 | Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in | 3553 | Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in |
3558 | the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain | 3554 | the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain |
3559 | (http://www.mingw.org). Set your HOST tools to the MinGW | 3555 | (http://www.mingw.org). Set your HOST tools to the MinGW |
3560 | toolchain and execute 'make tools'. For example: | 3556 | toolchain and execute 'make tools'. For example: |
3561 | 3557 | ||
3562 | $ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools | 3558 | $ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools |
3563 | 3559 | ||
3564 | Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can | 3560 | Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can |
3565 | be executed on computers running Windows. | 3561 | be executed on computers running Windows. |
3566 | 3562 | ||
3567 | U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the | 3563 | U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the |
3568 | sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This | 3564 | sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This |
3569 | is done by typing: | 3565 | is done by typing: |
3570 | 3566 | ||
3571 | make NAME_defconfig | 3567 | make NAME_defconfig |
3572 | 3568 | ||
3573 | where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu- | 3569 | where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu- |
3574 | rations; see boards.cfg for supported names. | 3570 | rations; see boards.cfg for supported names. |
3575 | 3571 | ||
3576 | Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if | 3572 | Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if |
3577 | additional information is available from the board vendor; for | 3573 | additional information is available from the board vendor; for |
3578 | instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard) | 3574 | instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard) |
3579 | or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features" | 3575 | or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features" |
3580 | when choosing the configuration, i. e. | 3576 | when choosing the configuration, i. e. |
3581 | 3577 | ||
3582 | make TQM823L_defconfig | 3578 | make TQM823L_defconfig |
3583 | - will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support | 3579 | - will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support |
3584 | 3580 | ||
3585 | make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig | 3581 | make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig |
3586 | - will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD | 3582 | - will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD |
3587 | 3583 | ||
3588 | etc. | 3584 | etc. |
3589 | 3585 | ||
3590 | 3586 | ||
3591 | Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot | 3587 | Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot |
3592 | images ready for download to / installation on your system: | 3588 | images ready for download to / installation on your system: |
3593 | 3589 | ||
3594 | - "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image | 3590 | - "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image |
3595 | - "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format | 3591 | - "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format |
3596 | - "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format | 3592 | - "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format |
3597 | 3593 | ||
3598 | By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved | 3594 | By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved |
3599 | in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change | 3595 | in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change |
3600 | this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory: | 3596 | this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory: |
3601 | 3597 | ||
3602 | 1. Add O= to the make command line invocations: | 3598 | 1. Add O= to the make command line invocations: |
3603 | 3599 | ||
3604 | make O=/tmp/build distclean | 3600 | make O=/tmp/build distclean |
3605 | make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig | 3601 | make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig |
3606 | make O=/tmp/build all | 3602 | make O=/tmp/build all |
3607 | 3603 | ||
3608 | 2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location: | 3604 | 2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location: |
3609 | 3605 | ||
3610 | export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build | 3606 | export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build |
3611 | make distclean | 3607 | make distclean |
3612 | make NAME_defconfig | 3608 | make NAME_defconfig |
3613 | make all | 3609 | make all |
3614 | 3610 | ||
3615 | Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment | 3611 | Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment |
3616 | variable. | 3612 | variable. |
3617 | 3613 | ||
3618 | User specific CPPFLAGS, AFLAGS and CFLAGS can be passed to the compiler by | 3614 | User specific CPPFLAGS, AFLAGS and CFLAGS can be passed to the compiler by |
3619 | setting the according environment variables KCPPFLAGS, KAFLAGS and KCFLAGS. | 3615 | setting the according environment variables KCPPFLAGS, KAFLAGS and KCFLAGS. |
3620 | For example to treat all compiler warnings as errors: | 3616 | For example to treat all compiler warnings as errors: |
3621 | 3617 | ||
3622 | make KCFLAGS=-Werror | 3618 | make KCFLAGS=-Werror |
3623 | 3619 | ||
3624 | Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so | 3620 | Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so |
3625 | for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of | 3621 | for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of |
3626 | native "make". | 3622 | native "make". |
3627 | 3623 | ||
3628 | 3624 | ||
3629 | If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need | 3625 | If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need |
3630 | to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these | 3626 | to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these |
3631 | steps: | 3627 | steps: |
3632 | 3628 | ||
3633 | 1. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any | 3629 | 1. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any |
3634 | files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least | 3630 | files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least |
3635 | the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c". | 3631 | the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c". |
3636 | 2. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for | 3632 | 2. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for |
3637 | your board. | 3633 | your board. |
3638 | 3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new | 3634 | 3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new |
3639 | directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need. | 3635 | directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need. |
3640 | 4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name. | 3636 | 4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name. |
3641 | 5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file | 3637 | 5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file |
3642 | to be installed on your target system. | 3638 | to be installed on your target system. |
3643 | 6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise. | 3639 | 6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise. |
3644 | [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.] | 3640 | [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.] |
3645 | 3641 | ||
3646 | 3642 | ||
3647 | Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.: | 3643 | Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.: |
3648 | ============================================================== | 3644 | ============================================================== |
3649 | 3645 | ||
3650 | If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board | 3646 | If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board |
3651 | or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to | 3647 | or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to |
3652 | provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes | 3648 | provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes |
3653 | the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest | 3649 | the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest |
3654 | official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources. | 3650 | official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources. |
3655 | 3651 | ||
3656 | But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi- | 3652 | But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi- |
3657 | cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of | 3653 | cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of |
3658 | the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so, | 3654 | the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so, |
3659 | just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will | 3655 | just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will |
3660 | configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this | 3656 | configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this |
3661 | will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H' | 3657 | will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H' |
3662 | for documentation. | 3658 | for documentation. |
3663 | 3659 | ||
3664 | 3660 | ||
3665 | See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below. | 3661 | See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below. |
3666 | 3662 | ||
3667 | 3663 | ||
3668 | Monitor Commands - Overview: | 3664 | Monitor Commands - Overview: |
3669 | ============================ | 3665 | ============================ |
3670 | 3666 | ||
3671 | go - start application at address 'addr' | 3667 | go - start application at address 'addr' |
3672 | run - run commands in an environment variable | 3668 | run - run commands in an environment variable |
3673 | bootm - boot application image from memory | 3669 | bootm - boot application image from memory |
3674 | bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol | 3670 | bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol |
3675 | bootz - boot zImage from memory | 3671 | bootz - boot zImage from memory |
3676 | tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol | 3672 | tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol |
3677 | and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip" | 3673 | and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip" |
3678 | (and eventually "gatewayip") | 3674 | (and eventually "gatewayip") |
3679 | tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol | 3675 | tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol |
3680 | rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol | 3676 | rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol |
3681 | diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd' | 3677 | diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd' |
3682 | loads - load S-Record file over serial line | 3678 | loads - load S-Record file over serial line |
3683 | loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode) | 3679 | loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode) |
3684 | md - memory display | 3680 | md - memory display |
3685 | mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing) | 3681 | mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing) |
3686 | nm - memory modify (constant address) | 3682 | nm - memory modify (constant address) |
3687 | mw - memory write (fill) | 3683 | mw - memory write (fill) |
3688 | cp - memory copy | 3684 | cp - memory copy |
3689 | cmp - memory compare | 3685 | cmp - memory compare |
3690 | crc32 - checksum calculation | 3686 | crc32 - checksum calculation |
3691 | i2c - I2C sub-system | 3687 | i2c - I2C sub-system |
3692 | sspi - SPI utility commands | 3688 | sspi - SPI utility commands |
3693 | base - print or set address offset | 3689 | base - print or set address offset |
3694 | printenv- print environment variables | 3690 | printenv- print environment variables |
3695 | setenv - set environment variables | 3691 | setenv - set environment variables |
3696 | saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage | 3692 | saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage |
3697 | protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection | 3693 | protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection |
3698 | erase - erase FLASH memory | 3694 | erase - erase FLASH memory |
3699 | flinfo - print FLASH memory information | 3695 | flinfo - print FLASH memory information |
3700 | nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand) | 3696 | nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand) |
3701 | bdinfo - print Board Info structure | 3697 | bdinfo - print Board Info structure |
3702 | iminfo - print header information for application image | 3698 | iminfo - print header information for application image |
3703 | coninfo - print console devices and informations | 3699 | coninfo - print console devices and informations |
3704 | ide - IDE sub-system | 3700 | ide - IDE sub-system |
3705 | loop - infinite loop on address range | 3701 | loop - infinite loop on address range |
3706 | loopw - infinite write loop on address range | 3702 | loopw - infinite write loop on address range |
3707 | mtest - simple RAM test | 3703 | mtest - simple RAM test |
3708 | icache - enable or disable instruction cache | 3704 | icache - enable or disable instruction cache |
3709 | dcache - enable or disable data cache | 3705 | dcache - enable or disable data cache |
3710 | reset - Perform RESET of the CPU | 3706 | reset - Perform RESET of the CPU |
3711 | echo - echo args to console | 3707 | echo - echo args to console |
3712 | version - print monitor version | 3708 | version - print monitor version |
3713 | help - print online help | 3709 | help - print online help |
3714 | ? - alias for 'help' | 3710 | ? - alias for 'help' |
3715 | 3711 | ||
3716 | 3712 | ||
3717 | Monitor Commands - Detailed Description: | 3713 | Monitor Commands - Detailed Description: |
3718 | ======================================== | 3714 | ======================================== |
3719 | 3715 | ||
3720 | TODO. | 3716 | TODO. |
3721 | 3717 | ||
3722 | For now: just type "help <command>". | 3718 | For now: just type "help <command>". |
3723 | 3719 | ||
3724 | 3720 | ||
3725 | Environment Variables: | 3721 | Environment Variables: |
3726 | ====================== | 3722 | ====================== |
3727 | 3723 | ||
3728 | U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which | 3724 | U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which |
3729 | can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory. | 3725 | can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory. |
3730 | 3726 | ||
3731 | Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using | 3727 | Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using |
3732 | "printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv" | 3728 | "printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv" |
3733 | without a value can be used to delete a variable from the | 3729 | without a value can be used to delete a variable from the |
3734 | environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are | 3730 | environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are |
3735 | working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the | 3731 | working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the |
3736 | environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided. | 3732 | environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided. |
3737 | 3733 | ||
3738 | Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables. | 3734 | Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables. |
3739 | 3735 | ||
3740 | List of environment variables (most likely not complete): | 3736 | List of environment variables (most likely not complete): |
3741 | 3737 | ||
3742 | baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE | 3738 | baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE |
3743 | 3739 | ||
3744 | bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY | 3740 | bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY |
3745 | 3741 | ||
3746 | bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND | 3742 | bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND |
3747 | 3743 | ||
3748 | bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image | 3744 | bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image |
3749 | 3745 | ||
3750 | bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP | 3746 | bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP |
3751 | 3747 | ||
3752 | bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm | 3748 | bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm |
3753 | command can be restricted. This variable is given as | 3749 | command can be restricted. This variable is given as |
3754 | a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed | 3750 | a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed |
3755 | for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size" | 3751 | for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size" |
3756 | environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is | 3752 | environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is |
3757 | also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux | 3753 | also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux |
3758 | kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and | 3754 | kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and |
3759 | bootm_mapsize. | 3755 | bootm_mapsize. |
3760 | 3756 | ||
3761 | bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel. | 3757 | bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel. |
3762 | This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it | 3758 | This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it |
3763 | defines the size of the memory region starting at base | 3759 | defines the size of the memory region starting at base |
3764 | address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel | 3760 | address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel |
3765 | during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used | 3761 | during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used |
3766 | as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is | 3762 | as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is |
3767 | used otherwise. | 3763 | used otherwise. |
3768 | 3764 | ||
3769 | bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm | 3765 | bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm |
3770 | command can be restricted. This variable is given as | 3766 | command can be restricted. This variable is given as |
3771 | a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region | 3767 | a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region |
3772 | allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low" | 3768 | allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low" |
3773 | environment variable. | 3769 | environment variable. |
3774 | 3770 | ||
3775 | updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used | 3771 | updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used |
3776 | by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to | 3772 | by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to |
3777 | documentation in doc/README.update for more details. | 3773 | documentation in doc/README.update for more details. |
3778 | 3774 | ||
3779 | autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'), | 3775 | autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'), |
3780 | "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the | 3776 | "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the |
3781 | configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to | 3777 | configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to |
3782 | load any image using TFTP | 3778 | load any image using TFTP |
3783 | 3779 | ||
3784 | autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp", | 3780 | autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp", |
3785 | "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will | 3781 | "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will |
3786 | be automatically started (by internally calling | 3782 | be automatically started (by internally calling |
3787 | "bootm") | 3783 | "bootm") |
3788 | 3784 | ||
3789 | If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the | 3785 | If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the |
3790 | "bootm" command will be copied to the load address | 3786 | "bootm" command will be copied to the load address |
3791 | (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started. | 3787 | (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started. |
3792 | This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary | 3788 | This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary |
3793 | data. | 3789 | data. |
3794 | 3790 | ||
3795 | fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the | 3791 | fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the |
3796 | flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot. | 3792 | flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot. |
3797 | For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory | 3793 | For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory |
3798 | at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel | 3794 | at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel |
3799 | only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you | 3795 | only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you |
3800 | may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the | 3796 | may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the |
3801 | device tree blob be copied to the maximum address | 3797 | device tree blob be copied to the maximum address |
3802 | of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can | 3798 | of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can |
3803 | access it during the boot procedure. | 3799 | access it during the boot procedure. |
3804 | 3800 | ||
3805 | If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then | 3801 | If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then |
3806 | the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this | 3802 | the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this |
3807 | to work it must reside in writable memory, have | 3803 | to work it must reside in writable memory, have |
3808 | sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to | 3804 | sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to |
3809 | add the information it needs into it, and the memory | 3805 | add the information it needs into it, and the memory |
3810 | must be accessible by the kernel. | 3806 | must be accessible by the kernel. |
3811 | 3807 | ||
3812 | fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened | 3808 | fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened |
3813 | device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is | 3809 | device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is |
3814 | defined. | 3810 | defined. |
3815 | 3811 | ||
3816 | i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only) | 3812 | i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only) |
3817 | if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast | 3813 | if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast |
3818 | mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in | 3814 | mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in |
3819 | initialization code. So, for changes to be effective | 3815 | initialization code. So, for changes to be effective |
3820 | it must be saved and board must be reset. | 3816 | it must be saved and board must be reset. |
3821 | 3817 | ||
3822 | initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images: | 3818 | initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images: |
3823 | If this variable is not set, initrd images will be | 3819 | If this variable is not set, initrd images will be |
3824 | copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this | 3820 | copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this |
3825 | is usually what you want since it allows for | 3821 | is usually what you want since it allows for |
3826 | maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to | 3822 | maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to |
3827 | make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the | 3823 | make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the |
3828 | CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment | 3824 | CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment |
3829 | variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0". | 3825 | variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0". |
3830 | Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper | 3826 | Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper |
3831 | address to use (U-Boot will still check that it | 3827 | address to use (U-Boot will still check that it |
3832 | does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data). | 3828 | does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data). |
3833 | 3829 | ||
3834 | For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB | 3830 | For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB |
3835 | RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux, | 3831 | RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux, |
3836 | you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of | 3832 | you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of |
3837 | the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make | 3833 | the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make |
3838 | sure that the initrd image is placed in the first | 3834 | sure that the initrd image is placed in the first |
3839 | 12 MB as well - this can be done with | 3835 | 12 MB as well - this can be done with |
3840 | 3836 | ||
3841 | setenv initrd_high 00c00000 | 3837 | setenv initrd_high 00c00000 |
3842 | 3838 | ||
3843 | If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an | 3839 | If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an |
3844 | indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal | 3840 | indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal |
3845 | for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash | 3841 | for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash |
3846 | memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the | 3842 | memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the |
3847 | ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the | 3843 | ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the |
3848 | boot time on your system, but requires that this | 3844 | boot time on your system, but requires that this |
3849 | feature is supported by your Linux kernel. | 3845 | feature is supported by your Linux kernel. |
3850 | 3846 | ||
3851 | ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command | 3847 | ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command |
3852 | 3848 | ||
3853 | loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp", | 3849 | loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp", |
3854 | "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot" | 3850 | "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot" |
3855 | 3851 | ||
3856 | loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO | 3852 | loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO |
3857 | 3853 | ||
3858 | serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command | 3854 | serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command |
3859 | 3855 | ||
3860 | bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME | 3856 | bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME |
3861 | 3857 | ||
3862 | bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR | 3858 | bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR |
3863 | 3859 | ||
3864 | bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR | 3860 | bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR |
3865 | 3861 | ||
3866 | ethprime - controls which interface is used first. | 3862 | ethprime - controls which interface is used first. |
3867 | 3863 | ||
3868 | ethact - controls which interface is currently active. | 3864 | ethact - controls which interface is currently active. |
3869 | For example you can do the following | 3865 | For example you can do the following |
3870 | 3866 | ||
3871 | => setenv ethact FEC | 3867 | => setenv ethact FEC |
3872 | => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC | 3868 | => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC |
3873 | => setenv ethact SCC | 3869 | => setenv ethact SCC |
3874 | => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC | 3870 | => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC |
3875 | 3871 | ||
3876 | ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all | 3872 | ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all |
3877 | available network interfaces. | 3873 | available network interfaces. |
3878 | It just stays at the currently selected interface. | 3874 | It just stays at the currently selected interface. |
3879 | 3875 | ||
3880 | netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will | 3876 | netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will |
3881 | either succeed or fail without retrying. | 3877 | either succeed or fail without retrying. |
3882 | When set to "once" the network operation will | 3878 | When set to "once" the network operation will |
3883 | fail when all the available network interfaces | 3879 | fail when all the available network interfaces |
3884 | are tried once without success. | 3880 | are tried once without success. |
3885 | Useful on scripts which control the retry operation | 3881 | Useful on scripts which control the retry operation |
3886 | themselves. | 3882 | themselves. |
3887 | 3883 | ||
3888 | npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode | 3884 | npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode |
3889 | 3885 | ||
3890 | silent_linux - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by | 3886 | silent_linux - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by |
3891 | changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be | 3887 | changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be |
3892 | made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If | 3888 | made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If |
3893 | unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console | 3889 | unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console |
3894 | is silent. | 3890 | is silent. |
3895 | 3891 | ||
3896 | tftpsrcp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's | 3892 | tftpsrcp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's |
3897 | UDP source port. | 3893 | UDP source port. |
3898 | 3894 | ||
3899 | tftpdstp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP | 3895 | tftpdstp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP |
3900 | destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69. | 3896 | destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69. |
3901 | 3897 | ||
3902 | tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set, | 3898 | tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set, |
3903 | we use the TFTP server's default block size | 3899 | we use the TFTP server's default block size |
3904 | 3900 | ||
3905 | tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli- | 3901 | tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli- |
3906 | seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines | 3902 | seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines |
3907 | when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to | 3903 | when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to |
3908 | be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds. | 3904 | be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds. |
3909 | Lowering this value may make downloads succeed | 3905 | Lowering this value may make downloads succeed |
3910 | faster in networks with high packet loss rates or | 3906 | faster in networks with high packet loss rates or |
3911 | with unreliable TFTP servers. | 3907 | with unreliable TFTP servers. |
3912 | 3908 | ||
3913 | tftptimeoutcountmax - maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no | 3909 | tftptimeoutcountmax - maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no |
3914 | unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts | 3910 | unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts |
3915 | can happen during a single file transfer before that | 3911 | can happen during a single file transfer before that |
3916 | transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means | 3912 | transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means |
3917 | 'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help | 3913 | 'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help |
3918 | downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with | 3914 | downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with |
3919 | unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware. | 3915 | unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware. |
3920 | 3916 | ||
3921 | vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over | 3917 | vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over |
3922 | Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q | 3918 | Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q |
3923 | VLAN tagged frames. | 3919 | VLAN tagged frames. |
3924 | 3920 | ||
3925 | bootpretryperiod - Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries. | 3921 | bootpretryperiod - Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries. |
3926 | Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will | 3922 | Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will |
3927 | be either the default (28000), or a value based on | 3923 | be either the default (28000), or a value based on |
3928 | CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has | 3924 | CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has |
3929 | precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT. | 3925 | precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT. |
3930 | 3926 | ||
3931 | The following image location variables contain the location of images | 3927 | The following image location variables contain the location of images |
3932 | used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is | 3928 | used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is |
3933 | not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment | 3929 | not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment |
3934 | variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP | 3930 | variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP |
3935 | server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be | 3931 | server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be |
3936 | loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR | 3932 | loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR |
3937 | flash or offset in NAND flash. | 3933 | flash or offset in NAND flash. |
3938 | 3934 | ||
3939 | *Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some | 3935 | *Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some |
3940 | boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some | 3936 | boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some |
3941 | boards use these variables for other purposes. | 3937 | boards use these variables for other purposes. |
3942 | 3938 | ||
3943 | Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location | 3939 | Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location |
3944 | ----- --------- ----------- -------------- | 3940 | ----- --------- ----------- -------------- |
3945 | u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr | 3941 | u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr |
3946 | Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr | 3942 | Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr |
3947 | device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr | 3943 | device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr |
3948 | ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr | 3944 | ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr |
3949 | 3945 | ||
3950 | The following environment variables may be used and automatically | 3946 | The following environment variables may be used and automatically |
3951 | updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"), | 3947 | updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"), |
3952 | depending the information provided by your boot server: | 3948 | depending the information provided by your boot server: |
3953 | 3949 | ||
3954 | bootfile - see above | 3950 | bootfile - see above |
3955 | dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server | 3951 | dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server |
3956 | dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server | 3952 | dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server |
3957 | gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use | 3953 | gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use |
3958 | hostname - Target hostname | 3954 | hostname - Target hostname |
3959 | ipaddr - see above | 3955 | ipaddr - see above |
3960 | netmask - Subnet Mask | 3956 | netmask - Subnet Mask |
3961 | rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server | 3957 | rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server |
3962 | serverip - see above | 3958 | serverip - see above |
3963 | 3959 | ||
3964 | 3960 | ||
3965 | There are two special Environment Variables: | 3961 | There are two special Environment Variables: |
3966 | 3962 | ||
3967 | serial# - contains hardware identification information such | 3963 | serial# - contains hardware identification information such |
3968 | as type string and/or serial number | 3964 | as type string and/or serial number |
3969 | ethaddr - Ethernet address | 3965 | ethaddr - Ethernet address |
3970 | 3966 | ||
3971 | These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of | 3967 | These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of |
3972 | the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables | 3968 | the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables |
3973 | once they have been set once. | 3969 | once they have been set once. |
3974 | 3970 | ||
3975 | 3971 | ||
3976 | Further special Environment Variables: | 3972 | Further special Environment Variables: |
3977 | 3973 | ||
3978 | ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed | 3974 | ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed |
3979 | with the "version" command. This variable is | 3975 | with the "version" command. This variable is |
3980 | readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE). | 3976 | readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE). |
3981 | 3977 | ||
3982 | 3978 | ||
3983 | Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take | 3979 | Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take |
3984 | only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-). | 3980 | only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-). |
3985 | 3981 | ||
3986 | 3982 | ||
3987 | Callback functions for environment variables: | 3983 | Callback functions for environment variables: |
3988 | --------------------------------------------- | 3984 | --------------------------------------------- |
3989 | 3985 | ||
3990 | For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change | 3986 | For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change |
3991 | when their values are changed. This functionality allows functions to | 3987 | when their values are changed. This functionality allows functions to |
3992 | be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or | 3988 | be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or |
3993 | deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side | 3989 | deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side |
3994 | effect to happen or for the change to be rejected. | 3990 | effect to happen or for the change to be rejected. |
3995 | 3991 | ||
3996 | The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the | 3992 | The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the |
3997 | U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code. | 3993 | U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code. |
3998 | 3994 | ||
3999 | These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The | 3995 | These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The |
4000 | static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC | 3996 | static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC |
4001 | in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of | 3997 | in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of |
4002 | associations. The list must be in the following format: | 3998 | associations. The list must be in the following format: |
4003 | 3999 | ||
4004 | entry = variable_name[:callback_name] | 4000 | entry = variable_name[:callback_name] |
4005 | list = entry[,list] | 4001 | list = entry[,list] |
4006 | 4002 | ||
4007 | If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted. | 4003 | If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted. |
4008 | Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list. | 4004 | Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list. |
4009 | 4005 | ||
4010 | Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable | 4006 | Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable |
4011 | with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will | 4007 | with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will |
4012 | override any association in the static list. You can define | 4008 | override any association in the static list. You can define |
4013 | CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the | 4009 | CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the |
4014 | ".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment. | 4010 | ".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment. |
4015 | 4011 | ||
4016 | If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a | 4012 | If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a |
4017 | regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to | 4013 | regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to |
4018 | the same callback without explicitly listing them all out. | 4014 | the same callback without explicitly listing them all out. |
4019 | 4015 | ||
4020 | 4016 | ||
4021 | Command Line Parsing: | 4017 | Command Line Parsing: |
4022 | ===================== | 4018 | ===================== |
4023 | 4019 | ||
4024 | There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot: | 4020 | There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot: |
4025 | the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell: | 4021 | the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell: |
4026 | 4022 | ||
4027 | Old, simple command line parser: | 4023 | Old, simple command line parser: |
4028 | -------------------------------- | 4024 | -------------------------------- |
4029 | 4025 | ||
4030 | - supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands) | 4026 | - supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands) |
4031 | - several commands on one line, separated by ';' | 4027 | - several commands on one line, separated by ';' |
4032 | - variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax | 4028 | - variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax |
4033 | - special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\', | 4029 | - special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\', |
4034 | for example: | 4030 | for example: |
4035 | setenv bootcmd bootm \${address} | 4031 | setenv bootcmd bootm \${address} |
4036 | - You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example: | 4032 | - You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example: |
4037 | setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off' | 4033 | setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off' |
4038 | 4034 | ||
4039 | Hush shell: | 4035 | Hush shell: |
4040 | ----------- | 4036 | ----------- |
4041 | 4037 | ||
4042 | - similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like | 4038 | - similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like |
4043 | if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done, | 4039 | if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done, |
4044 | until...do...done, ... | 4040 | until...do...done, ... |
4045 | - supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv | 4041 | - supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv |
4046 | commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax | 4042 | commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax |
4047 | "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run" | 4043 | "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run" |
4048 | command | 4044 | command |
4049 | 4045 | ||
4050 | General rules: | 4046 | General rules: |
4051 | -------------- | 4047 | -------------- |
4052 | 4048 | ||
4053 | (1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run" | 4049 | (1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run" |
4054 | command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and | 4050 | command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and |
4055 | one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be | 4051 | one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be |
4056 | executed anyway. | 4052 | executed anyway. |
4057 | 4053 | ||
4058 | (2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e. | 4054 | (2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e. |
4059 | calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing | 4055 | calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing |
4060 | command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining | 4056 | command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining |
4061 | variables are not executed. | 4057 | variables are not executed. |
4062 | 4058 | ||
4063 | Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces: | 4059 | Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces: |
4064 | ======================================= | 4060 | ======================================= |
4065 | 4061 | ||
4066 | Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports | 4062 | Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports |
4067 | such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a | 4063 | such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a |
4068 | "working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows: | 4064 | "working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows: |
4069 | 4065 | ||
4070 | Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding | 4066 | Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding |
4071 | MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0), | 4067 | MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0), |
4072 | "eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ... | 4068 | "eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ... |
4073 | 4069 | ||
4074 | If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance | 4070 | If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance |
4075 | in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon- | 4071 | in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon- |
4076 | ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment | 4072 | ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment |
4077 | variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means: | 4073 | variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means: |
4078 | 4074 | ||
4079 | o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the | 4075 | o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the |
4080 | environment, the SROM's address is used. | 4076 | environment, the SROM's address is used. |
4081 | 4077 | ||
4082 | o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the | 4078 | o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the |
4083 | environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is | 4079 | environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is |
4084 | used. | 4080 | used. |
4085 | 4081 | ||
4086 | o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and | 4082 | o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and |
4087 | both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used. | 4083 | both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used. |
4088 | 4084 | ||
4089 | o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the | 4085 | o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the |
4090 | addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a | 4086 | addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a |
4091 | warning is printed. | 4087 | warning is printed. |
4092 | 4088 | ||
4093 | o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error | 4089 | o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error |
4094 | is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case | 4090 | is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case |
4095 | a random, locally-assigned MAC is used. | 4091 | a random, locally-assigned MAC is used. |
4096 | 4092 | ||
4097 | If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses | 4093 | If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses |
4098 | will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This | 4094 | will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This |
4099 | may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable. | 4095 | may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable. |
4100 | The naming convention is as follows: | 4096 | The naming convention is as follows: |
4101 | "ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc. | 4097 | "ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc. |
4102 | 4098 | ||
4103 | Image Formats: | 4099 | Image Formats: |
4104 | ============== | 4100 | ============== |
4105 | 4101 | ||
4106 | U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on) | 4102 | U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on) |
4107 | images in two formats: | 4103 | images in two formats: |
4108 | 4104 | ||
4109 | New uImage format (FIT) | 4105 | New uImage format (FIT) |
4110 | ----------------------- | 4106 | ----------------------- |
4111 | 4107 | ||
4112 | Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar | 4108 | Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar |
4113 | to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple | 4109 | to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple |
4114 | components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by | 4110 | components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by |
4115 | SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory. | 4111 | SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory. |
4116 | 4112 | ||
4117 | 4113 | ||
4118 | Old uImage format | 4114 | Old uImage format |
4119 | ----------------- | 4115 | ----------------- |
4120 | 4116 | ||
4121 | Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything, | 4117 | Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything, |
4122 | preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for | 4118 | preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for |
4123 | details; basically, the header defines the following image properties: | 4119 | details; basically, the header defines the following image properties: |
4124 | 4120 | ||
4125 | * Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD, | 4121 | * Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD, |
4126 | 4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks, | 4122 | 4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks, |
4127 | LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY; | 4123 | LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY; |
4128 | Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS, | 4124 | Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS, |
4129 | INTEGRITY). | 4125 | INTEGRITY). |
4130 | * Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86, | 4126 | * Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86, |
4131 | IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit; | 4127 | IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit; |
4132 | Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC). | 4128 | Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC). |
4133 | * Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2) | 4129 | * Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2) |
4134 | * Load Address | 4130 | * Load Address |
4135 | * Entry Point | 4131 | * Entry Point |
4136 | * Image Name | 4132 | * Image Name |
4137 | * Image Timestamp | 4133 | * Image Timestamp |
4138 | 4134 | ||
4139 | The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header | 4135 | The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header |
4140 | and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by | 4136 | and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by |
4141 | CRC32 checksums. | 4137 | CRC32 checksums. |
4142 | 4138 | ||
4143 | 4139 | ||
4144 | Linux Support: | 4140 | Linux Support: |
4145 | ============== | 4141 | ============== |
4146 | 4142 | ||
4147 | Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application | 4143 | Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application |
4148 | easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of | 4144 | easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of |
4149 | U-Boot. | 4145 | U-Boot. |
4150 | 4146 | ||
4151 | U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some | 4147 | U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some |
4152 | special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any | 4148 | special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any |
4153 | "initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image; | 4149 | "initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image; |
4154 | instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation | 4150 | instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation |
4155 | serves several purposes: | 4151 | serves several purposes: |
4156 | 4152 | ||
4157 | - the same features can be used for other OS or standalone | 4153 | - the same features can be used for other OS or standalone |
4158 | applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the | 4154 | applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the |
4159 | Flash memory footprint) | 4155 | Flash memory footprint) |
4160 | 4156 | ||
4161 | - it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because | 4157 | - it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because |
4162 | lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot | 4158 | lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot |
4163 | 4159 | ||
4164 | - the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd" | 4160 | - the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd" |
4165 | images; of course this also means that different kernel images can | 4161 | images; of course this also means that different kernel images can |
4166 | be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't | 4162 | be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't |
4167 | have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just | 4163 | have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just |
4168 | change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the | 4164 | change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the |
4169 | software is easier now. | 4165 | software is easier now. |
4170 | 4166 | ||
4171 | 4167 | ||
4172 | Linux HOWTO: | 4168 | Linux HOWTO: |
4173 | ============ | 4169 | ============ |
4174 | 4170 | ||
4175 | Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems: | 4171 | Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems: |
4176 | --------------------------------------- | 4172 | --------------------------------------- |
4177 | 4173 | ||
4178 | U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to | 4174 | U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to |
4179 | configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware | 4175 | configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware |
4180 | (no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to | 4176 | (no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to |
4181 | Linux :-). | 4177 | Linux :-). |
4182 | 4178 | ||
4183 | But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot). | 4179 | But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot). |
4184 | 4180 | ||
4185 | Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance | 4181 | Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance |
4186 | include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board | 4182 | include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board |
4187 | Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h, | 4183 | Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h, |
4188 | and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value | 4184 | and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value |
4189 | as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR. | 4185 | as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR. |
4190 | 4186 | ||
4191 | Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers. | 4187 | Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers. |
4192 | If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there | 4188 | If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there |
4193 | is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See | 4189 | is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See |
4194 | doc/driver-model. | 4190 | doc/driver-model. |
4195 | 4191 | ||
4196 | 4192 | ||
4197 | Configuring the Linux kernel: | 4193 | Configuring the Linux kernel: |
4198 | ----------------------------- | 4194 | ----------------------------- |
4199 | 4195 | ||
4200 | No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root | 4196 | No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root |
4201 | device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system. | 4197 | device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system. |
4202 | 4198 | ||
4203 | 4199 | ||
4204 | Building a Linux Image: | 4200 | Building a Linux Image: |
4205 | ----------------------- | 4201 | ----------------------- |
4206 | 4202 | ||
4207 | With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are | 4203 | With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are |
4208 | not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target | 4204 | not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target |
4209 | "uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by | 4205 | "uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by |
4210 | U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target, | 4206 | U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target, |
4211 | which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a | 4207 | which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a |
4212 | 100% compatible format. | 4208 | 100% compatible format. |
4213 | 4209 | ||
4214 | Example: | 4210 | Example: |
4215 | 4211 | ||
4216 | make TQM850L_defconfig | 4212 | make TQM850L_defconfig |
4217 | make oldconfig | 4213 | make oldconfig |
4218 | make dep | 4214 | make dep |
4219 | make uImage | 4215 | make uImage |
4220 | 4216 | ||
4221 | The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to | 4217 | The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to |
4222 | encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information, | 4218 | encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information, |
4223 | CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing: | 4219 | CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing: |
4224 | 4220 | ||
4225 | * build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format): | 4221 | * build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format): |
4226 | 4222 | ||
4227 | * convert the kernel into a raw binary image: | 4223 | * convert the kernel into a raw binary image: |
4228 | 4224 | ||
4229 | ${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \ | 4225 | ${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \ |
4230 | -R .note -R .comment \ | 4226 | -R .note -R .comment \ |
4231 | -S vmlinux linux.bin | 4227 | -S vmlinux linux.bin |
4232 | 4228 | ||
4233 | * compress the binary image: | 4229 | * compress the binary image: |
4234 | 4230 | ||
4235 | gzip -9 linux.bin | 4231 | gzip -9 linux.bin |
4236 | 4232 | ||
4237 | * package compressed binary image for U-Boot: | 4233 | * package compressed binary image for U-Boot: |
4238 | 4234 | ||
4239 | mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \ | 4235 | mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \ |
4240 | -a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \ | 4236 | -a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \ |
4241 | -d linux.bin.gz uImage | 4237 | -d linux.bin.gz uImage |
4242 | 4238 | ||
4243 | 4239 | ||
4244 | The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use | 4240 | The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use |
4245 | with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or | 4241 | with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or |
4246 | combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64 | 4242 | combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64 |
4247 | byte header containing information about target architecture, | 4243 | byte header containing information about target architecture, |
4248 | operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time | 4244 | operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time |
4249 | stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc. | 4245 | stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc. |
4250 | 4246 | ||
4251 | "mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and | 4247 | "mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and |
4252 | print the header information, or to build new images. | 4248 | print the header information, or to build new images. |
4253 | 4249 | ||
4254 | In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information | 4250 | In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information |
4255 | contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes | 4251 | contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes |
4256 | checksum verification: | 4252 | checksum verification: |
4257 | 4253 | ||
4258 | tools/mkimage -l image | 4254 | tools/mkimage -l image |
4259 | -l ==> list image header information | 4255 | -l ==> list image header information |
4260 | 4256 | ||
4261 | The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image | 4257 | The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image |
4262 | from a "data file" which is used as image payload: | 4258 | from a "data file" which is used as image payload: |
4263 | 4259 | ||
4264 | tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \ | 4260 | tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \ |
4265 | -n name -d data_file image | 4261 | -n name -d data_file image |
4266 | -A ==> set architecture to 'arch' | 4262 | -A ==> set architecture to 'arch' |
4267 | -O ==> set operating system to 'os' | 4263 | -O ==> set operating system to 'os' |
4268 | -T ==> set image type to 'type' | 4264 | -T ==> set image type to 'type' |
4269 | -C ==> set compression type 'comp' | 4265 | -C ==> set compression type 'comp' |
4270 | -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex) | 4266 | -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex) |
4271 | -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex) | 4267 | -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex) |
4272 | -n ==> set image name to 'name' | 4268 | -n ==> set image name to 'name' |
4273 | -d ==> use image data from 'datafile' | 4269 | -d ==> use image data from 'datafile' |
4274 | 4270 | ||
4275 | Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load | 4271 | Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load |
4276 | address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the | 4272 | address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the |
4277 | kernel version: | 4273 | kernel version: |
4278 | 4274 | ||
4279 | - 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C, | 4275 | - 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C, |
4280 | - 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000. | 4276 | - 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000. |
4281 | 4277 | ||
4282 | So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read: | 4278 | So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read: |
4283 | 4279 | ||
4284 | -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ | 4280 | -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ |
4285 | > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \ | 4281 | > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \ |
4286 | > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \ | 4282 | > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \ |
4287 | > examples/uImage.TQM850L | 4283 | > examples/uImage.TQM850L |
4288 | Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L | 4284 | Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L |
4289 | Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 | 4285 | Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 |
4290 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) | 4286 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) |
4291 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB | 4287 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB |
4292 | Load Address: 0x00000000 | 4288 | Load Address: 0x00000000 |
4293 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 | 4289 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 |
4294 | 4290 | ||
4295 | To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption): | 4291 | To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption): |
4296 | 4292 | ||
4297 | -> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L | 4293 | -> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L |
4298 | Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L | 4294 | Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L |
4299 | Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 | 4295 | Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 |
4300 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) | 4296 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) |
4301 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB | 4297 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB |
4302 | Load Address: 0x00000000 | 4298 | Load Address: 0x00000000 |
4303 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 | 4299 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 |
4304 | 4300 | ||
4305 | NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade | 4301 | NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade |
4306 | speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this | 4302 | speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this |
4307 | needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not | 4303 | needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not |
4308 | need to be uncompressed: | 4304 | need to be uncompressed: |
4309 | 4305 | ||
4310 | -> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz | 4306 | -> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz |
4311 | -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ | 4307 | -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ |
4312 | > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \ | 4308 | > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \ |
4313 | > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \ | 4309 | > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \ |
4314 | > examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed | 4310 | > examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed |
4315 | Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L | 4311 | Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L |
4316 | Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 | 4312 | Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 |
4317 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed) | 4313 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed) |
4318 | Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB | 4314 | Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB |
4319 | Load Address: 0x00000000 | 4315 | Load Address: 0x00000000 |
4320 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 | 4316 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 |
4321 | 4317 | ||
4322 | 4318 | ||
4323 | Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file | 4319 | Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file |
4324 | when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk: | 4320 | when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk: |
4325 | 4321 | ||
4326 | -> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \ | 4322 | -> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \ |
4327 | > -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \ | 4323 | > -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \ |
4328 | > -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd | 4324 | > -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd |
4329 | Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image | 4325 | Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image |
4330 | Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000 | 4326 | Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000 |
4331 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) | 4327 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) |
4332 | Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB | 4328 | Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB |
4333 | Load Address: 0x00000000 | 4329 | Load Address: 0x00000000 |
4334 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 | 4330 | Entry Point: 0x00000000 |
4335 | 4331 | ||
4336 | The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i" | 4332 | The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i" |
4337 | option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d" | 4333 | option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d" |
4338 | option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file" | 4334 | option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file" |
4339 | from the image: | 4335 | from the image: |
4340 | 4336 | ||
4341 | tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file | 4337 | tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file |
4342 | -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file' | 4338 | -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file' |
4343 | -T ==> set image type to 'type' | 4339 | -T ==> set image type to 'type' |
4344 | -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image' | 4340 | -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image' |
4345 | 4341 | ||
4346 | 4342 | ||
4347 | Installing a Linux Image: | 4343 | Installing a Linux Image: |
4348 | ------------------------- | 4344 | ------------------------- |
4349 | 4345 | ||
4350 | To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface, | 4346 | To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface, |
4351 | you must convert the image to S-Record format: | 4347 | you must convert the image to S-Record format: |
4352 | 4348 | ||
4353 | objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec | 4349 | objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec |
4354 | 4350 | ||
4355 | The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot | 4351 | The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot |
4356 | image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to | 4352 | image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to |
4357 | address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to | 4353 | address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to |
4358 | specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads' | 4354 | specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads' |
4359 | command. | 4355 | command. |
4360 | 4356 | ||
4361 | Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the | 4357 | Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the |
4362 | TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank): | 4358 | TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank): |
4363 | 4359 | ||
4364 | => erase 40100000 401FFFFF | 4360 | => erase 40100000 401FFFFF |
4365 | 4361 | ||
4366 | .......... done | 4362 | .......... done |
4367 | Erased 8 sectors | 4363 | Erased 8 sectors |
4368 | 4364 | ||
4369 | => loads 40100000 | 4365 | => loads 40100000 |
4370 | ## Ready for S-Record download ... | 4366 | ## Ready for S-Record download ... |
4371 | ~>examples/image.srec | 4367 | ~>examples/image.srec |
4372 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ... | 4368 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ... |
4373 | ... | 4369 | ... |
4374 | 15989 15990 15991 15992 | 4370 | 15989 15990 15991 15992 |
4375 | [file transfer complete] | 4371 | [file transfer complete] |
4376 | [connected] | 4372 | [connected] |
4377 | ## Start Addr = 0x00000000 | 4373 | ## Start Addr = 0x00000000 |
4378 | 4374 | ||
4379 | 4375 | ||
4380 | You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command; | 4376 | You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command; |
4381 | this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data | 4377 | this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data |
4382 | corruption happened: | 4378 | corruption happened: |
4383 | 4379 | ||
4384 | => imi 40100000 | 4380 | => imi 40100000 |
4385 | 4381 | ||
4386 | ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... | 4382 | ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... |
4387 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L | 4383 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L |
4388 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) | 4384 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) |
4389 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB | 4385 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB |
4390 | Load Address: 00000000 | 4386 | Load Address: 00000000 |
4391 | Entry Point: 0000000c | 4387 | Entry Point: 0000000c |
4392 | Verifying Checksum ... OK | 4388 | Verifying Checksum ... OK |
4393 | 4389 | ||
4394 | 4390 | ||
4395 | Boot Linux: | 4391 | Boot Linux: |
4396 | ----------- | 4392 | ----------- |
4397 | 4393 | ||
4398 | The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in | 4394 | The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in |
4399 | memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents | 4395 | memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents |
4400 | of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as | 4396 | of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as |
4401 | parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the | 4397 | parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the |
4402 | "printenv" and "setenv" commands: | 4398 | "printenv" and "setenv" commands: |
4403 | 4399 | ||
4404 | 4400 | ||
4405 | => printenv bootargs | 4401 | => printenv bootargs |
4406 | bootargs=root=/dev/ram | 4402 | bootargs=root=/dev/ram |
4407 | 4403 | ||
4408 | => setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 | 4404 | => setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 |
4409 | 4405 | ||
4410 | => printenv bootargs | 4406 | => printenv bootargs |
4411 | bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 | 4407 | bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 |
4412 | 4408 | ||
4413 | => bootm 40020000 | 4409 | => bootm 40020000 |
4414 | ## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ... | 4410 | ## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ... |
4415 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L | 4411 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L |
4416 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) | 4412 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) |
4417 | Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB | 4413 | Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB |
4418 | Load Address: 00000000 | 4414 | Load Address: 00000000 |
4419 | Entry Point: 0000000c | 4415 | Entry Point: 0000000c |
4420 | Verifying Checksum ... OK | 4416 | Verifying Checksum ... OK |
4421 | Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK | 4417 | Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK |
4422 | Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000 | 4418 | Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000 |
4423 | Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 | 4419 | Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 |
4424 | time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 | 4420 | time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 |
4425 | Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS | 4421 | Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS |
4426 | Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000] | 4422 | Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000] |
4427 | ... | 4423 | ... |
4428 | 4424 | ||
4429 | If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass | 4425 | If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass |
4430 | the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT | 4426 | the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT |
4431 | format!) to the "bootm" command: | 4427 | format!) to the "bootm" command: |
4432 | 4428 | ||
4433 | => imi 40100000 40200000 | 4429 | => imi 40100000 40200000 |
4434 | 4430 | ||
4435 | ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... | 4431 | ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... |
4436 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L | 4432 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L |
4437 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) | 4433 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) |
4438 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB | 4434 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB |
4439 | Load Address: 00000000 | 4435 | Load Address: 00000000 |
4440 | Entry Point: 0000000c | 4436 | Entry Point: 0000000c |
4441 | Verifying Checksum ... OK | 4437 | Verifying Checksum ... OK |
4442 | 4438 | ||
4443 | ## Checking Image at 40200000 ... | 4439 | ## Checking Image at 40200000 ... |
4444 | Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image | 4440 | Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image |
4445 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) | 4441 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) |
4446 | Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB | 4442 | Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB |
4447 | Load Address: 00000000 | 4443 | Load Address: 00000000 |
4448 | Entry Point: 00000000 | 4444 | Entry Point: 00000000 |
4449 | Verifying Checksum ... OK | 4445 | Verifying Checksum ... OK |
4450 | 4446 | ||
4451 | => bootm 40100000 40200000 | 4447 | => bootm 40100000 40200000 |
4452 | ## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ... | 4448 | ## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ... |
4453 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L | 4449 | Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L |
4454 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) | 4450 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) |
4455 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB | 4451 | Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB |
4456 | Load Address: 00000000 | 4452 | Load Address: 00000000 |
4457 | Entry Point: 0000000c | 4453 | Entry Point: 0000000c |
4458 | Verifying Checksum ... OK | 4454 | Verifying Checksum ... OK |
4459 | Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK | 4455 | Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK |
4460 | ## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ... | 4456 | ## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ... |
4461 | Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image | 4457 | Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image |
4462 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) | 4458 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) |
4463 | Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB | 4459 | Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB |
4464 | Load Address: 00000000 | 4460 | Load Address: 00000000 |
4465 | Entry Point: 00000000 | 4461 | Entry Point: 00000000 |
4466 | Verifying Checksum ... OK | 4462 | Verifying Checksum ... OK |
4467 | Loading Ramdisk ... OK | 4463 | Loading Ramdisk ... OK |
4468 | Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000 | 4464 | Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000 |
4469 | Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram | 4465 | Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram |
4470 | time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 | 4466 | time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 |
4471 | Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS | 4467 | Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS |
4472 | ... | 4468 | ... |
4473 | RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0 | 4469 | RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0 |
4474 | VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem). | 4470 | VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem). |
4475 | 4471 | ||
4476 | bash# | 4472 | bash# |
4477 | 4473 | ||
4478 | Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree: | 4474 | Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree: |
4479 | ----------- | 4475 | ----------- |
4480 | 4476 | ||
4481 | First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section | 4477 | First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section |
4482 | titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The | 4478 | titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The |
4483 | following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated | 4479 | following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated |
4484 | flat device tree: | 4480 | flat device tree: |
4485 | 4481 | ||
4486 | => print oftaddr | 4482 | => print oftaddr |
4487 | oftaddr=0x300000 | 4483 | oftaddr=0x300000 |
4488 | => print oft | 4484 | => print oft |
4489 | oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb | 4485 | oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb |
4490 | => tftp $oftaddr $oft | 4486 | => tftp $oftaddr $oft |
4491 | Speed: 1000, full duplex | 4487 | Speed: 1000, full duplex |
4492 | Using TSEC0 device | 4488 | Using TSEC0 device |
4493 | TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101 | 4489 | TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101 |
4494 | Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'. | 4490 | Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'. |
4495 | Load address: 0x300000 | 4491 | Load address: 0x300000 |
4496 | Loading: # | 4492 | Loading: # |
4497 | done | 4493 | done |
4498 | Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex) | 4494 | Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex) |
4499 | => tftp $loadaddr $bootfile | 4495 | => tftp $loadaddr $bootfile |
4500 | Speed: 1000, full duplex | 4496 | Speed: 1000, full duplex |
4501 | Using TSEC0 device | 4497 | Using TSEC0 device |
4502 | TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2 | 4498 | TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2 |
4503 | Filename 'uImage'. | 4499 | Filename 'uImage'. |
4504 | Load address: 0x200000 | 4500 | Load address: 0x200000 |
4505 | Loading:############ | 4501 | Loading:############ |
4506 | done | 4502 | done |
4507 | Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex) | 4503 | Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex) |
4508 | => print loadaddr | 4504 | => print loadaddr |
4509 | loadaddr=200000 | 4505 | loadaddr=200000 |
4510 | => print oftaddr | 4506 | => print oftaddr |
4511 | oftaddr=0x300000 | 4507 | oftaddr=0x300000 |
4512 | => bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr | 4508 | => bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr |
4513 | ## Booting image at 00200000 ... | 4509 | ## Booting image at 00200000 ... |
4514 | Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty | 4510 | Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty |
4515 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) | 4511 | Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) |
4516 | Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB | 4512 | Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB |
4517 | Load Address: 00000000 | 4513 | Load Address: 00000000 |
4518 | Entry Point: 00000000 | 4514 | Entry Point: 00000000 |
4519 | Verifying Checksum ... OK | 4515 | Verifying Checksum ... OK |
4520 | Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK | 4516 | Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK |
4521 | Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000 | 4517 | Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000 |
4522 | Using MPC85xx ADS machine description | 4518 | Using MPC85xx ADS machine description |
4523 | Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb | 4519 | Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb |
4524 | [snip] | 4520 | [snip] |
4525 | 4521 | ||
4526 | 4522 | ||
4527 | More About U-Boot Image Types: | 4523 | More About U-Boot Image Types: |
4528 | ------------------------------ | 4524 | ------------------------------ |
4529 | 4525 | ||
4530 | U-Boot supports the following image types: | 4526 | U-Boot supports the following image types: |
4531 | 4527 | ||
4532 | "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment | 4528 | "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment |
4533 | provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave | 4529 | provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave |
4534 | well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from | 4530 | well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from |
4535 | the Standalone Program. | 4531 | the Standalone Program. |
4536 | "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which | 4532 | "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which |
4537 | will take over control completely. Usually these programs | 4533 | will take over control completely. Usually these programs |
4538 | will install their own set of exception handlers, device | 4534 | will install their own set of exception handlers, device |
4539 | drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot | 4535 | drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot |
4540 | expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU. | 4536 | expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU. |
4541 | "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their | 4537 | "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their |
4542 | parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is | 4538 | parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is |
4543 | being started. | 4539 | being started. |
4544 | "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS | 4540 | "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS |
4545 | (Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like | 4541 | (Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like |
4546 | RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want | 4542 | RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want |
4547 | to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot | 4543 | to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot |
4548 | server provides just a single image file, but you want to get | 4544 | server provides just a single image file, but you want to get |
4549 | for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image. | 4545 | for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image. |
4550 | 4546 | ||
4551 | "Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each | 4547 | "Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each |
4552 | image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network | 4548 | image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network |
4553 | byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0". | 4549 | byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0". |
4554 | Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by | 4550 | Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by |
4555 | one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to | 4551 | one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to |
4556 | a multiple of 4 bytes). | 4552 | a multiple of 4 bytes). |
4557 | 4553 | ||
4558 | "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like | 4554 | "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like |
4559 | U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to | 4555 | U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to |
4560 | flash memory. | 4556 | flash memory. |
4561 | 4557 | ||
4562 | "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by | 4558 | "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by |
4563 | U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially | 4559 | U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially |
4564 | useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush) | 4560 | useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush) |
4565 | as command interpreter. | 4561 | as command interpreter. |
4566 | 4562 | ||
4567 | Booting the Linux zImage: | 4563 | Booting the Linux zImage: |
4568 | ------------------------- | 4564 | ------------------------- |
4569 | 4565 | ||
4570 | On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done | 4566 | On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done |
4571 | using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same | 4567 | using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same |
4572 | as the syntax of "bootm" command. | 4568 | as the syntax of "bootm" command. |
4573 | 4569 | ||
4574 | Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply | 4570 | Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply |
4575 | kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the | 4571 | kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the |
4576 | address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following | 4572 | address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following |
4577 | format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>". | 4573 | format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>". |
4578 | 4574 | ||
4579 | 4575 | ||
4580 | Standalone HOWTO: | 4576 | Standalone HOWTO: |
4581 | ================= | 4577 | ================= |
4582 | 4578 | ||
4583 | One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and | 4579 | One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and |
4584 | run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of | 4580 | run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of |
4585 | U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services. | 4581 | U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services. |
4586 | 4582 | ||
4587 | Two simple examples are included with the sources: | 4583 | Two simple examples are included with the sources: |
4588 | 4584 | ||
4589 | "Hello World" Demo: | 4585 | "Hello World" Demo: |
4590 | ------------------- | 4586 | ------------------- |
4591 | 4587 | ||
4592 | 'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo | 4588 | 'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo |
4593 | application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot. | 4589 | application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot. |
4594 | It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it | 4590 | It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it |
4595 | like that: | 4591 | like that: |
4596 | 4592 | ||
4597 | => loads | 4593 | => loads |
4598 | ## Ready for S-Record download ... | 4594 | ## Ready for S-Record download ... |
4599 | ~>examples/hello_world.srec | 4595 | ~>examples/hello_world.srec |
4600 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... | 4596 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... |
4601 | [file transfer complete] | 4597 | [file transfer complete] |
4602 | [connected] | 4598 | [connected] |
4603 | ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 | 4599 | ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 |
4604 | 4600 | ||
4605 | => go 40004 Hello World! This is a test. | 4601 | => go 40004 Hello World! This is a test. |
4606 | ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... | 4602 | ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... |
4607 | Hello World | 4603 | Hello World |
4608 | argc = 7 | 4604 | argc = 7 |
4609 | argv[0] = "40004" | 4605 | argv[0] = "40004" |
4610 | argv[1] = "Hello" | 4606 | argv[1] = "Hello" |
4611 | argv[2] = "World!" | 4607 | argv[2] = "World!" |
4612 | argv[3] = "This" | 4608 | argv[3] = "This" |
4613 | argv[4] = "is" | 4609 | argv[4] = "is" |
4614 | argv[5] = "a" | 4610 | argv[5] = "a" |
4615 | argv[6] = "test." | 4611 | argv[6] = "test." |
4616 | argv[7] = "<NULL>" | 4612 | argv[7] = "<NULL>" |
4617 | Hit any key to exit ... | 4613 | Hit any key to exit ... |
4618 | 4614 | ||
4619 | ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 | 4615 | ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 |
4620 | 4616 | ||
4621 | Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt | 4617 | Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt |
4622 | handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'. | 4618 | handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'. |
4623 | Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second. | 4619 | Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second. |
4624 | The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.' | 4620 | The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.' |
4625 | character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be | 4621 | character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be |
4626 | controlled by the following keys: | 4622 | controlled by the following keys: |
4627 | 4623 | ||
4628 | ? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers | 4624 | ? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers |
4629 | b - enable interrupts and start timer | 4625 | b - enable interrupts and start timer |
4630 | e - stop timer and disable interrupts | 4626 | e - stop timer and disable interrupts |
4631 | q - quit application | 4627 | q - quit application |
4632 | 4628 | ||
4633 | => loads | 4629 | => loads |
4634 | ## Ready for S-Record download ... | 4630 | ## Ready for S-Record download ... |
4635 | ~>examples/timer.srec | 4631 | ~>examples/timer.srec |
4636 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... | 4632 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... |
4637 | [file transfer complete] | 4633 | [file transfer complete] |
4638 | [connected] | 4634 | [connected] |
4639 | ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 | 4635 | ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 |
4640 | 4636 | ||
4641 | => go 40004 | 4637 | => go 40004 |
4642 | ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... | 4638 | ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... |
4643 | TIMERS=0xfff00980 | 4639 | TIMERS=0xfff00980 |
4644 | Using timer 1 | 4640 | Using timer 1 |
4645 | tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0 | 4641 | tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0 |
4646 | 4642 | ||
4647 | Hit 'b': | 4643 | Hit 'b': |
4648 | [q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us | 4644 | [q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us |
4649 | Enabling timer | 4645 | Enabling timer |
4650 | Hit '?': | 4646 | Hit '?': |
4651 | [q, b, e, ?] ........ | 4647 | [q, b, e, ?] ........ |
4652 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0 | 4648 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0 |
4653 | Hit '?': | 4649 | Hit '?': |
4654 | [q, b, e, ?] . | 4650 | [q, b, e, ?] . |
4655 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0 | 4651 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0 |
4656 | Hit '?': | 4652 | Hit '?': |
4657 | [q, b, e, ?] . | 4653 | [q, b, e, ?] . |
4658 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0 | 4654 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0 |
4659 | Hit '?': | 4655 | Hit '?': |
4660 | [q, b, e, ?] . | 4656 | [q, b, e, ?] . |
4661 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0 | 4657 | tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0 |
4662 | Hit 'e': | 4658 | Hit 'e': |
4663 | [q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer | 4659 | [q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer |
4664 | Hit 'q': | 4660 | Hit 'q': |
4665 | [q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 | 4661 | [q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 |
4666 | 4662 | ||
4667 | 4663 | ||
4668 | Minicom warning: | 4664 | Minicom warning: |
4669 | ================ | 4665 | ================ |
4670 | 4666 | ||
4671 | Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the | 4667 | Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the |
4672 | "minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd) | 4668 | "minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd) |
4673 | consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under | 4669 | consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under |
4674 | Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and | 4670 | Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and |
4675 | especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and | 4671 | especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and |
4676 | use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See | 4672 | use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See |
4677 | http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3. | 4673 | http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3. |
4678 | for help with kermit. | 4674 | for help with kermit. |
4679 | 4675 | ||
4680 | 4676 | ||
4681 | Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this | 4677 | Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this |
4682 | configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section: | 4678 | configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section: |
4683 | 4679 | ||
4684 | Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi | 4680 | Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi |
4685 | X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N | 4681 | X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N |
4686 | Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N | 4682 | Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N |
4687 | 4683 | ||
4688 | 4684 | ||
4689 | NetBSD Notes: | 4685 | NetBSD Notes: |
4690 | ============= | 4686 | ============= |
4691 | 4687 | ||
4692 | Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host | 4688 | Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host |
4693 | (build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx). | 4689 | (build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx). |
4694 | 4690 | ||
4695 | Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on | 4691 | Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on |
4696 | NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also | 4692 | NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also |
4697 | need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make). | 4693 | need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make). |
4698 | Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files; | 4694 | Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files; |
4699 | attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is | 4695 | attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is |
4700 | missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually: | 4696 | missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually: |
4701 | 4697 | ||
4702 | # cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include | 4698 | # cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include |
4703 | # mkdir powerpc | 4699 | # mkdir powerpc |
4704 | # ln -s powerpc machine | 4700 | # ln -s powerpc machine |
4705 | # cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h | 4701 | # cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h |
4706 | # ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST | 4702 | # ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST |
4707 | 4703 | ||
4708 | Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native | 4704 | Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native |
4709 | and U-Boot include files. | 4705 | and U-Boot include files. |
4710 | 4706 | ||
4711 | Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a | 4707 | Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a |
4712 | stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel | 4708 | stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel |
4713 | proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source | 4709 | proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source |
4714 | tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the | 4710 | tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the |
4715 | meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz | 4711 | meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz |
4716 | 4712 | ||
4717 | 4713 | ||
4718 | Implementation Internals: | 4714 | Implementation Internals: |
4719 | ========================= | 4715 | ========================= |
4720 | 4716 | ||
4721 | The following is not intended to be a complete description of every | 4717 | The following is not intended to be a complete description of every |
4722 | implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the | 4718 | implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the |
4723 | inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom | 4719 | inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom |
4724 | hardware. | 4720 | hardware. |
4725 | 4721 | ||
4726 | 4722 | ||
4727 | Initial Stack, Global Data: | 4723 | Initial Stack, Global Data: |
4728 | --------------------------- | 4724 | --------------------------- |
4729 | 4725 | ||
4730 | The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot | 4726 | The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot |
4731 | starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to | 4727 | starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to |
4732 | system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet). | 4728 | system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet). |
4733 | This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS | 4729 | This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS |
4734 | is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working | 4730 | is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working |
4735 | at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation | 4731 | at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation |
4736 | options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU | 4732 | options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU |
4737 | models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and | 4733 | models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and |
4738 | MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be | 4734 | MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be |
4739 | locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc. | 4735 | locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc. |
4740 | 4736 | ||
4741 | Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the | 4737 | Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the |
4742 | U-Boot mailing list: | 4738 | U-Boot mailing list: |
4743 | 4739 | ||
4744 | Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)? | 4740 | Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)? |
4745 | From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com> | 4741 | From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com> |
4746 | Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET) | 4742 | Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET) |
4747 | ... | 4743 | ... |
4748 | 4744 | ||
4749 | Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it | 4745 | Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it |
4750 | is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not | 4746 | is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not |
4751 | require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness | 4747 | require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness |
4752 | is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of | 4748 | is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of |
4753 | necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's | 4749 | necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's |
4754 | beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you | 4750 | beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you |
4755 | can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and | 4751 | can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and |
4756 | operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals. | 4752 | operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals. |
4757 | 4753 | ||
4758 | OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It | 4754 | OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It |
4759 | is another option for the system designer to use as an | 4755 | is another option for the system designer to use as an |
4760 | initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either | 4756 | initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either |
4761 | option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your | 4757 | option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your |
4762 | board designers haven't used it for something that would | 4758 | board designers haven't used it for something that would |
4763 | cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not | 4759 | cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not |
4764 | used. | 4760 | used. |
4765 | 4761 | ||
4766 | CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere | 4762 | CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere |
4767 | with your processor/board/system design. The default value | 4763 | with your processor/board/system design. The default value |
4768 | you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in | 4764 | you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in |
4769 | walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger | 4765 | walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger |
4770 | than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set | 4766 | than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set |
4771 | it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources | 4767 | it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources |
4772 | that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in | 4768 | that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in |
4773 | start.S has been around a while and should work as is when | 4769 | start.S has been around a while and should work as is when |
4774 | you get the config right. | 4770 | you get the config right. |
4775 | 4771 | ||
4776 | -Chris Hallinan | 4772 | -Chris Hallinan |
4777 | DS4.COM, Inc. | 4773 | DS4.COM, Inc. |
4778 | 4774 | ||
4779 | It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C | 4775 | It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C |
4780 | code for the initialization procedures: | 4776 | code for the initialization procedures: |
4781 | 4777 | ||
4782 | * Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt | 4778 | * Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt |
4783 | to write it. | 4779 | to write it. |
4784 | 4780 | ||
4785 | * Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized | 4781 | * Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized |
4786 | as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali- | 4782 | as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali- |
4787 | zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM). | 4783 | zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM). |
4788 | 4784 | ||
4789 | * Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like | 4785 | * Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like |
4790 | that. | 4786 | that. |
4791 | 4787 | ||
4792 | Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use | 4788 | Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use |
4793 | normal global data to share information between the code. But it | 4789 | normal global data to share information between the code. But it |
4794 | turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly | 4790 | turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly |
4795 | simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all | 4791 | simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all |
4796 | functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_ | 4792 | functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_ |
4797 | functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of | 4793 | functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of |
4798 | the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we | 4794 | the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we |
4799 | place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we | 4795 | place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we |
4800 | reserve for this purpose. | 4796 | reserve for this purpose. |
4801 | 4797 | ||
4802 | When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the | 4798 | When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the |
4803 | relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by | 4799 | relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by |
4804 | GCC's implementation. | 4800 | GCC's implementation. |
4805 | 4801 | ||
4806 | For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use: | 4802 | For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use: |
4807 | R1: stack pointer | 4803 | R1: stack pointer |
4808 | R2: reserved for system use | 4804 | R2: reserved for system use |
4809 | R3-R4: parameter passing and return values | 4805 | R3-R4: parameter passing and return values |
4810 | R5-R10: parameter passing | 4806 | R5-R10: parameter passing |
4811 | R13: small data area pointer | 4807 | R13: small data area pointer |
4812 | R30: GOT pointer | 4808 | R30: GOT pointer |
4813 | R31: frame pointer | 4809 | R31: frame pointer |
4814 | 4810 | ||
4815 | (U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12 | 4811 | (U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12 |
4816 | is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when | 4812 | is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when |
4817 | going back and forth between asm and C) | 4813 | going back and forth between asm and C) |
4818 | 4814 | ||
4819 | ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data | 4815 | ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data |
4820 | 4816 | ||
4821 | Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the | 4817 | Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the |
4822 | address of the global data structure is known at compile time), | 4818 | address of the global data structure is known at compile time), |
4823 | but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat | 4819 | but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat |
4824 | smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on | 4820 | smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on |
4825 | average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image, | 4821 | average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image, |
4826 | 624 text + 127 data). | 4822 | 624 text + 127 data). |
4827 | 4823 | ||
4828 | On ARM, the following registers are used: | 4824 | On ARM, the following registers are used: |
4829 | 4825 | ||
4830 | R0: function argument word/integer result | 4826 | R0: function argument word/integer result |
4831 | R1-R3: function argument word | 4827 | R1-R3: function argument word |
4832 | R9: platform specific | 4828 | R9: platform specific |
4833 | R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled) | 4829 | R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled) |
4834 | R11: argument (frame) pointer | 4830 | R11: argument (frame) pointer |
4835 | R12: temporary workspace | 4831 | R12: temporary workspace |
4836 | R13: stack pointer | 4832 | R13: stack pointer |
4837 | R14: link register | 4833 | R14: link register |
4838 | R15: program counter | 4834 | R15: program counter |
4839 | 4835 | ||
4840 | ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data | 4836 | ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data |
4841 | 4837 | ||
4842 | Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported. | 4838 | Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported. |
4843 | 4839 | ||
4844 | On Nios II, the ABI is documented here: | 4840 | On Nios II, the ABI is documented here: |
4845 | http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf | 4841 | http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf |
4846 | 4842 | ||
4847 | ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data | 4843 | ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data |
4848 | 4844 | ||
4849 | Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp | 4845 | Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp |
4850 | to access small data sections, so gp is free. | 4846 | to access small data sections, so gp is free. |
4851 | 4847 | ||
4852 | On NDS32, the following registers are used: | 4848 | On NDS32, the following registers are used: |
4853 | 4849 | ||
4854 | R0-R1: argument/return | 4850 | R0-R1: argument/return |
4855 | R2-R5: argument | 4851 | R2-R5: argument |
4856 | R15: temporary register for assembler | 4852 | R15: temporary register for assembler |
4857 | R16: trampoline register | 4853 | R16: trampoline register |
4858 | R28: frame pointer (FP) | 4854 | R28: frame pointer (FP) |
4859 | R29: global pointer (GP) | 4855 | R29: global pointer (GP) |
4860 | R30: link register (LP) | 4856 | R30: link register (LP) |
4861 | R31: stack pointer (SP) | 4857 | R31: stack pointer (SP) |
4862 | PC: program counter (PC) | 4858 | PC: program counter (PC) |
4863 | 4859 | ||
4864 | ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data | 4860 | ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data |
4865 | 4861 | ||
4866 | NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope, | 4862 | NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope, |
4867 | or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much. | 4863 | or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much. |
4868 | 4864 | ||
4869 | On RISC-V, the following registers are used: | 4865 | On RISC-V, the following registers are used: |
4870 | 4866 | ||
4871 | x0: hard-wired zero (zero) | 4867 | x0: hard-wired zero (zero) |
4872 | x1: return address (ra) | 4868 | x1: return address (ra) |
4873 | x2: stack pointer (sp) | 4869 | x2: stack pointer (sp) |
4874 | x3: global pointer (gp) | 4870 | x3: global pointer (gp) |
4875 | x4: thread pointer (tp) | 4871 | x4: thread pointer (tp) |
4876 | x5: link register (t0) | 4872 | x5: link register (t0) |
4877 | x8: frame pointer (fp) | 4873 | x8: frame pointer (fp) |
4878 | x10-x11: arguments/return values (a0-1) | 4874 | x10-x11: arguments/return values (a0-1) |
4879 | x12-x17: arguments (a2-7) | 4875 | x12-x17: arguments (a2-7) |
4880 | x28-31: temporaries (t3-6) | 4876 | x28-31: temporaries (t3-6) |
4881 | pc: program counter (pc) | 4877 | pc: program counter (pc) |
4882 | 4878 | ||
4883 | ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data | 4879 | ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data |
4884 | 4880 | ||
4885 | Memory Management: | 4881 | Memory Management: |
4886 | ------------------ | 4882 | ------------------ |
4887 | 4883 | ||
4888 | U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the | 4884 | U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the |
4889 | MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection. | 4885 | MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection. |
4890 | 4886 | ||
4891 | The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory | 4887 | The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory |
4892 | controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each | 4888 | controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each |
4893 | memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several | 4889 | memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several |
4894 | physical memory banks. | 4890 | physical memory banks. |
4895 | 4891 | ||
4896 | U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on | 4892 | U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on |
4897 | TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After | 4893 | TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After |
4898 | booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself | 4894 | booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself |
4899 | to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some | 4895 | to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some |
4900 | memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN | 4896 | memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN |
4901 | configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board | 4897 | configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board |
4902 | Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward). | 4898 | Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward). |
4903 | 4899 | ||
4904 | Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB | 4900 | Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB |
4905 | of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF). | 4901 | of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF). |
4906 | 4902 | ||
4907 | So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like | 4903 | So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like |
4908 | this: | 4904 | this: |
4909 | 4905 | ||
4910 | 0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code | 4906 | 0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code |
4911 | : | 4907 | : |
4912 | 0x0000 1FFF | 4908 | 0x0000 1FFF |
4913 | 0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use | 4909 | 0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use |
4914 | : | 4910 | : |
4915 | : | 4911 | : |
4916 | 4912 | ||
4917 | : | 4913 | : |
4918 | : | 4914 | : |
4919 | 0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward) | 4915 | 0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward) |
4920 | 0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data | 4916 | 0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data |
4921 | 0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena | 4917 | 0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena |
4922 | : | 4918 | : |
4923 | 0x00FD FFFF | 4919 | 0x00FD FFFF |
4924 | 0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code | 4920 | 0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code |
4925 | ... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer | 4921 | ... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer |
4926 | ... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset) | 4922 | ... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset) |
4927 | 0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM] | 4923 | 0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM] |
4928 | 4924 | ||
4929 | 4925 | ||
4930 | System Initialization: | 4926 | System Initialization: |
4931 | ---------------------- | 4927 | ---------------------- |
4932 | 4928 | ||
4933 | In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point | 4929 | In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point |
4934 | (on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset | 4930 | (on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset |
4935 | configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory. | 4931 | configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory. |
4936 | To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address. | 4932 | To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address. |
4937 | To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!) | 4933 | To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!) |
4938 | initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs | 4934 | initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs |
4939 | which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data | 4935 | which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data |
4940 | cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and | 4936 | cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and |
4941 | the SIU. | 4937 | the SIU. |
4942 | 4938 | ||
4943 | Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a | 4939 | Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a |
4944 | preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries | 4940 | preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries |
4945 | (multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash | 4941 | (multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash |
4946 | on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is | 4942 | on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is |
4947 | programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a | 4943 | programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a |
4948 | simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM | 4944 | simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM |
4949 | banks. | 4945 | banks. |
4950 | 4946 | ||
4951 | When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of | 4947 | When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of |
4952 | different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first | 4948 | different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first |
4953 | bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address | 4949 | bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address |
4954 | 0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create | 4950 | 0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create |
4955 | contiguous memory starting from 0. | 4951 | contiguous memory starting from 0. |
4956 | 4952 | ||
4957 | Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area | 4953 | Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area |
4958 | and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board | 4954 | and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board |
4959 | Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM | 4955 | Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM |
4960 | pages, and the final stack is set up. | 4956 | pages, and the final stack is set up. |
4961 | 4957 | ||
4962 | Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment; | 4958 | Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment; |
4963 | until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are | 4959 | until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are |
4964 | running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a | 4960 | running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a |
4965 | new address in RAM. | 4961 | new address in RAM. |
4966 | 4962 | ||
4967 | 4963 | ||
4968 | U-Boot Porting Guide: | 4964 | U-Boot Porting Guide: |
4969 | ---------------------- | 4965 | ---------------------- |
4970 | 4966 | ||
4971 | [Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing | 4967 | [Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing |
4972 | list, October 2002] | 4968 | list, October 2002] |
4973 | 4969 | ||
4974 | 4970 | ||
4975 | int main(int argc, char *argv[]) | 4971 | int main(int argc, char *argv[]) |
4976 | { | 4972 | { |
4977 | sighandler_t no_more_time; | 4973 | sighandler_t no_more_time; |
4978 | 4974 | ||
4979 | signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time); | 4975 | signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time); |
4980 | alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK)); | 4976 | alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK)); |
4981 | 4977 | ||
4982 | if (available_money > available_manpower) { | 4978 | if (available_money > available_manpower) { |
4983 | Pay consultant to port U-Boot; | 4979 | Pay consultant to port U-Boot; |
4984 | return 0; | 4980 | return 0; |
4985 | } | 4981 | } |
4986 | 4982 | ||
4987 | Download latest U-Boot source; | 4983 | Download latest U-Boot source; |
4988 | 4984 | ||
4989 | Subscribe to u-boot mailing list; | 4985 | Subscribe to u-boot mailing list; |
4990 | 4986 | ||
4991 | if (clueless) | 4987 | if (clueless) |
4992 | email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?"); | 4988 | email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?"); |
4993 | 4989 | ||
4994 | while (learning) { | 4990 | while (learning) { |
4995 | Read the README file in the top level directory; | 4991 | Read the README file in the top level directory; |
4996 | Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual; | 4992 | Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual; |
4997 | Read applicable doc/*.README; | 4993 | Read applicable doc/*.README; |
4998 | Read the source, Luke; | 4994 | Read the source, Luke; |
4999 | /* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */ | 4995 | /* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */ |
5000 | } | 4996 | } |
5001 | 4997 | ||
5002 | if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500)) | 4998 | if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500)) |
5003 | Buy a BDI3000; | 4999 | Buy a BDI3000; |
5004 | else | 5000 | else |
5005 | Add a lot of aggravation and time; | 5001 | Add a lot of aggravation and time; |
5006 | 5002 | ||
5007 | if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */ | 5003 | if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */ |
5008 | cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard> | 5004 | cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard> |
5009 | cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h | 5005 | cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h |
5010 | } else { | 5006 | } else { |
5011 | Create your own board support subdirectory; | 5007 | Create your own board support subdirectory; |
5012 | Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file; | 5008 | Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file; |
5013 | } | 5009 | } |
5014 | Edit new board/<myboard> files | 5010 | Edit new board/<myboard> files |
5015 | Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h | 5011 | Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h |
5016 | 5012 | ||
5017 | while (!accepted) { | 5013 | while (!accepted) { |
5018 | while (!running) { | 5014 | while (!running) { |
5019 | do { | 5015 | do { |
5020 | Add / modify source code; | 5016 | Add / modify source code; |
5021 | } until (compiles); | 5017 | } until (compiles); |
5022 | Debug; | 5018 | Debug; |
5023 | if (clueless) | 5019 | if (clueless) |
5024 | email("Hi, I am having problems..."); | 5020 | email("Hi, I am having problems..."); |
5025 | } | 5021 | } |
5026 | Send patch file to the U-Boot email list; | 5022 | Send patch file to the U-Boot email list; |
5027 | if (reasonable critiques) | 5023 | if (reasonable critiques) |
5028 | Incorporate improvements from email list code review; | 5024 | Incorporate improvements from email list code review; |
5029 | else | 5025 | else |
5030 | Defend code as written; | 5026 | Defend code as written; |
5031 | } | 5027 | } |
5032 | 5028 | ||
5033 | return 0; | 5029 | return 0; |
5034 | } | 5030 | } |
5035 | 5031 | ||
5036 | void no_more_time (int sig) | 5032 | void no_more_time (int sig) |
5037 | { | 5033 | { |
5038 | hire_a_guru(); | 5034 | hire_a_guru(); |
5039 | } | 5035 | } |
5040 | 5036 | ||
5041 | 5037 | ||
5042 | Coding Standards: | 5038 | Coding Standards: |
5043 | ----------------- | 5039 | ----------------- |
5044 | 5040 | ||
5045 | All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel | 5041 | All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel |
5046 | coding style; see the kernel coding style guide at | 5042 | coding style; see the kernel coding style guide at |
5047 | https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/process/coding-style.html, and the | 5043 | https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/process/coding-style.html, and the |
5048 | script "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory. | 5044 | script "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory. |
5049 | 5045 | ||
5050 | Source files originating from a different project (for example the | 5046 | Source files originating from a different project (for example the |
5051 | MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not | 5047 | MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not |
5052 | reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those | 5048 | reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those |
5053 | sources. | 5049 | sources. |
5054 | 5050 | ||
5055 | Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in | 5051 | Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in |
5056 | Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//) | 5052 | Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//) |
5057 | in your code. | 5053 | in your code. |
5058 | 5054 | ||
5059 | Please also stick to the following formatting rules: | 5055 | Please also stick to the following formatting rules: |
5060 | - remove any trailing white space | 5056 | - remove any trailing white space |
5061 | - use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces | 5057 | - use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces |
5062 | - make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds | 5058 | - make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds |
5063 | - do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files | 5059 | - do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files |
5064 | - do not add trailing empty lines to source files | 5060 | - do not add trailing empty lines to source files |
5065 | 5061 | ||
5066 | Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned | 5062 | Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned |
5067 | with a request to reformat the changes. | 5063 | with a request to reformat the changes. |
5068 | 5064 | ||
5069 | 5065 | ||
5070 | Submitting Patches: | 5066 | Submitting Patches: |
5071 | ------------------- | 5067 | ------------------- |
5072 | 5068 | ||
5073 | Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to | 5069 | Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to |
5074 | establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules | 5070 | establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules |
5075 | may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff. | 5071 | may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff. |
5076 | 5072 | ||
5077 | Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details. | 5073 | Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details. |
5078 | 5074 | ||
5079 | Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>; | 5075 | Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>; |
5080 | see https://lists.denx.de/listinfo/u-boot | 5076 | see https://lists.denx.de/listinfo/u-boot |
5081 | 5077 | ||
5082 | When you send a patch, please include the following information with | 5078 | When you send a patch, please include the following information with |
5083 | it: | 5079 | it: |
5084 | 5080 | ||
5085 | * For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes | 5081 | * For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes |
5086 | this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the | 5082 | this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the |
5087 | patch actually fixes something. | 5083 | patch actually fixes something. |
5088 | 5084 | ||
5089 | * For new features: a description of the feature and your | 5085 | * For new features: a description of the feature and your |
5090 | implementation. | 5086 | implementation. |
5091 | 5087 | ||
5092 | * A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch) | 5088 | * A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch) |
5093 | 5089 | ||
5094 | * For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your | 5090 | * For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your |
5095 | information and associated file and directory references. | 5091 | information and associated file and directory references. |
5096 | 5092 | ||
5097 | * When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a | 5093 | * When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a |
5098 | maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too. | 5094 | maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too. |
5099 | 5095 | ||
5100 | * If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to | 5096 | * If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to |
5101 | document these in the README file. | 5097 | document these in the README file. |
5102 | 5098 | ||
5103 | * The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly* | 5099 | * The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly* |
5104 | recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the | 5100 | recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the |
5105 | "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to | 5101 | "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to |
5106 | the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems | 5102 | the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems |
5107 | with some other mail clients. | 5103 | with some other mail clients. |
5108 | 5104 | ||
5109 | If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of | 5105 | If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of |
5110 | diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of | 5106 | diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of |
5111 | GNU diff. | 5107 | GNU diff. |
5112 | 5108 | ||
5113 | The current directory when running this command shall be the parent | 5109 | The current directory when running this command shall be the parent |
5114 | directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that | 5110 | directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that |
5115 | your patch includes sufficient directory information for the | 5111 | your patch includes sufficient directory information for the |
5116 | affected files). | 5112 | affected files). |
5117 | 5113 | ||
5118 | We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged, | 5114 | We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged, |
5119 | and compressed attachments must not be used. | 5115 | and compressed attachments must not be used. |
5120 | 5116 | ||
5121 | * If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several | 5117 | * If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several |
5122 | files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file. | 5118 | files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file. |
5123 | 5119 | ||
5124 | * Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be | 5120 | * Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be |
5125 | submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset. | 5121 | submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset. |
5126 | 5122 | ||
5127 | 5123 | ||
5128 | Notes: | 5124 | Notes: |
5129 | 5125 | ||
5130 | * Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched | 5126 | * Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched |
5131 | source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported | 5127 | source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported |
5132 | for any of the boards. | 5128 | for any of the boards. |
5133 | 5129 | ||
5134 | * Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch | 5130 | * Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch |
5135 | containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be | 5131 | containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be |
5136 | returned with a request to re-formatting / split it. | 5132 | returned with a request to re-formatting / split it. |
5137 | 5133 | ||
5138 | * If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not | 5134 | * If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not |
5139 | add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful! | 5135 | add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful! |
5140 | When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only | 5136 | When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only |
5141 | (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature | 5137 | (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature |
5142 | disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your | 5138 | disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your |
5143 | modification. | 5139 | modification. |
5144 | 5140 | ||
5145 | * Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the | 5141 | * Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the |
5146 | u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are | 5142 | u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are |
5147 | reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches | 5143 | reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches |
5148 | bigger than the size limit should be avoided. | 5144 | bigger than the size limit should be avoided. |
5149 | 5145 |
drivers/bootcount/Kconfig
1 | # | 1 | # |
2 | # Boot count configuration | 2 | # Boot count configuration |
3 | # | 3 | # |
4 | 4 | ||
5 | menuconfig BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT | 5 | menuconfig BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT |
6 | bool "Enable support for checking boot count limit" | 6 | bool "Enable support for checking boot count limit" |
7 | help | 7 | help |
8 | Enable checking for exceeding the boot count limit. | 8 | Enable checking for exceeding the boot count limit. |
9 | More information: http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit | 9 | More information: http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit |
10 | 10 | ||
11 | if BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT | 11 | if BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT |
12 | 12 | ||
13 | choice | 13 | choice |
14 | prompt "Boot count device" | 14 | prompt "Boot count device" |
15 | default BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX if AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX | 15 | default BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX if AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX |
16 | default BOOTCOUNT_AT91 if AT91SAM9XE | ||
16 | 17 | ||
17 | config BOOTCOUNT_EXT | 18 | config BOOTCOUNT_EXT |
18 | bool "Boot counter on EXT filesystem" | 19 | bool "Boot counter on EXT filesystem" |
19 | help | 20 | help |
20 | Add support for maintaining boot count in a file on an EXT | 21 | Add support for maintaining boot count in a file on an EXT |
21 | filesystem. | 22 | filesystem. |
22 | 23 | ||
23 | config BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX | 24 | config BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX |
24 | bool "Boot counter in AM33XX RTC IP block" | 25 | bool "Boot counter in AM33XX RTC IP block" |
25 | depends on AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX | 26 | depends on AM33XX || SOC_DA8XX |
26 | help | 27 | help |
27 | A bootcount driver for the RTC IP block found on many TI platforms. | 28 | A bootcount driver for the RTC IP block found on many TI platforms. |
28 | This requires the RTC clocks, etc, to be enabled prior to use and | 29 | This requires the RTC clocks, etc, to be enabled prior to use and |
29 | not all boards with this IP block on it will have the RTC in use. | 30 | not all boards with this IP block on it will have the RTC in use. |
30 | 31 | ||
31 | config BOOTCOUNT_ENV | 32 | config BOOTCOUNT_ENV |
32 | bool "Boot counter in environment" | 33 | bool "Boot counter in environment" |
33 | help | 34 | help |
34 | If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware | 35 | If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware |
35 | "bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a | 36 | "bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a |
36 | saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable | 37 | saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable |
37 | "upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is | 38 | "upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is |
38 | 0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is | 39 | 0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is |
39 | 1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment. | 40 | 1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment. |
40 | So the Userspace Application must set the "upgrade_available" | 41 | So the Userspace Application must set the "upgrade_available" |
41 | and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully. | 42 | and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully. |
42 | 43 | ||
43 | config BOOTCOUNT_RAM | 44 | config BOOTCOUNT_RAM |
44 | bool "Boot counter in RAM" | 45 | bool "Boot counter in RAM" |
45 | help | 46 | help |
46 | Store the bootcount in DRAM protected against against bit errors | 47 | Store the bootcount in DRAM protected against against bit errors |
47 | due to short power loss or holding a system in RESET. | 48 | due to short power loss or holding a system in RESET. |
48 | 49 | ||
49 | config BOOTCOUNT_I2C | 50 | config BOOTCOUNT_I2C |
50 | bool "Boot counter on I2C device" | 51 | bool "Boot counter on I2C device" |
51 | help | 52 | help |
52 | Enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device. | 53 | Enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device. |
53 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address | 54 | CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address |
54 | CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for | 55 | CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for |
55 | the bootcounter. | 56 | the bootcounter. |
56 | CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len | 57 | CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len |
58 | |||
59 | config BOOTCOUNT_AT91 | ||
60 | bool "Boot counter for Atmel AT91SAM9XE" | ||
61 | depends on AT91SAM9XE | ||
57 | 62 | ||
58 | endchoice | 63 | endchoice |
59 | 64 | ||
60 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_SINGLEWORD | 65 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_SINGLEWORD |
61 | bool "Use single word to pack boot count and magic value" | 66 | bool "Use single word to pack boot count and magic value" |
62 | help | 67 | help |
63 | This option enables packing boot count magic value and boot count | 68 | This option enables packing boot count magic value and boot count |
64 | into single word (32 bits). | 69 | into single word (32 bits). |
65 | 70 | ||
66 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_INTERFACE | 71 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_INTERFACE |
67 | string "Interface on which to find boot counter EXT filesystem" | 72 | string "Interface on which to find boot counter EXT filesystem" |
68 | default "mmc" | 73 | default "mmc" |
69 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT | 74 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT |
70 | help | 75 | help |
71 | Set the interface to use when locating the filesystem to use for the | 76 | Set the interface to use when locating the filesystem to use for the |
72 | boot counter. | 77 | boot counter. |
73 | 78 | ||
74 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_DEVPART | 79 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_DEVPART |
75 | string "Partition of the boot counter EXT filesystem" | 80 | string "Partition of the boot counter EXT filesystem" |
76 | default "0:1" | 81 | default "0:1" |
77 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT | 82 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT |
78 | help | 83 | help |
79 | Set the partition to use when locating the filesystem to use for the | 84 | Set the partition to use when locating the filesystem to use for the |
80 | boot counter. | 85 | boot counter. |
81 | 86 | ||
82 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_NAME | 87 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_NAME |
83 | string "Path and filename of the EXT filesystem based boot counter" | 88 | string "Path and filename of the EXT filesystem based boot counter" |
84 | default "/boot/failures" | 89 | default "/boot/failures" |
85 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT | 90 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT |
86 | help | 91 | help |
87 | Set the filename and path of the file used to store the boot counter. | 92 | Set the filename and path of the file used to store the boot counter. |
88 | 93 | ||
89 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR | 94 | config SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR |
90 | hex "RAM address used for reading and writing the boot counter" | 95 | hex "RAM address used for reading and writing the boot counter" |
91 | default 0x7000A000 | 96 | default 0x7000A000 |
92 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT | 97 | depends on BOOTCOUNT_EXT |
93 | help | 98 | help |
94 | Set the address used for reading and writing the boot counter. | 99 | Set the address used for reading and writing the boot counter. |
95 | 100 | ||
96 | endif | 101 | endif |
97 | 102 |
drivers/bootcount/Makefile
1 | # | 1 | # |
2 | # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ | 2 | # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ |
3 | # | 3 | # |
4 | 4 | ||
5 | obj-y += bootcount.o | 5 | obj-y += bootcount.o |
6 | obj-$(CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE) += bootcount_at91.o | 6 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_AT91) += bootcount_at91.o |
7 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX) += bootcount_davinci.o | 7 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_AM33XX) += bootcount_davinci.o |
8 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM) += bootcount_ram.o | 8 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM) += bootcount_ram.o |
9 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV) += bootcount_env.o | 9 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV) += bootcount_env.o |
10 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C) += bootcount_i2c.o | 10 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C) += bootcount_i2c.o |
11 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_EXT) += bootcount_ext.o | 11 | obj-$(CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_EXT) += bootcount_ext.o |
12 | 12 |